Venice Campus
Central Energy Plant Improvements Specifications
November 2, 2017
Engineering Matrix, Inc. 2860 Scherer Drive, Suite 640 St. Petersburg, Florida 33716 (727) 573-4656 * www.engmtx.com
© Engineering Matrix, Inc. Matrix No. 16-0700.4 STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
MECHANICAL INDEX
15010...... BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15140...... SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
15170...... MOTORS
15190...... MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15242...... VIBRATION ISOLATION
15260...... PIPING INSULATION
15280...... EQUIPMENT INSULATION
15400...... TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
15410...... PLUMBING PIPING
15430...... PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15510...... HYDRONIC PIPING
15515...... HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
15540...... HVAC PUMPS
15545...... CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT
15684...... CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER
15920...... VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
15975...... BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
15990...... TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
© ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
ADVANCE PURCHASE SPECIFICATIONS
15000-AP ...... NOTES TO BIDDERS (ADVANCED PURCHASE CHILLER EQUIPMENT)
15684-AP ...... CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE)
© ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic mechanical requirements specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to Division 1—General Requirements, General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. This Division of the specifications includes mechanical;
1. Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning (HVAC).
2. Plumbing, and that mechanical which applies to heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and plumbing.
1.02 INTENT
A. It is the intention of these specifications and drawings to call for finished work, tested, and ready for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is used, it shall mean "furnish and install complete and ready for use."
B. Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper installation and operation, shall be included in the work, the same as if herein specified or shown.
C. The term “Basis of Design” used throughout this document shall be understood to mean a particular manufacturer’s equipment (as scheduled specifically on the drawings or specifications) has been used as the basis by the Design Engineer to establish physical dimensions, quality, and performance required, in addition to providing a basis for interaction with other ancillary components and/or other trades. Therefore, it shall be understood that use of a piece of equipment other than that identified as the Basis of Design may impact performance of an overall engineered system or may require revisions to ancillary interfacing equipment, and thus any manufacturer’s equipment other than that listed as Basis of Design shall require written approval via Addendum prior to bid except where the manufacturer’s name is specifically listed in these specifications as a pre-approved substitute or an accepted manufacturer. All substitutes, pre-approved substitutes, accepted manufacturers, and/or Basis of Design are subject to all requirements of quality, physical characteristics (i.e., dimension, sound, etc), and performance, etc., as set forth in these specifications and contract documents.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
D. Tampa Bay Trane Contractor Subsidiary shall be excluded from bidding.
1.03 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site and check the correctness of same as related to the work. All material take-offs for the site shall be field measured prior to bids.
1.04 DRAWINGS
A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the contract. Drawings are not to be scaled. The architectural drawings and details shall be examined for exact location of fixtures and equipment. Where they are not definitely located, this information shall be obtained from the Architect.
B. If directed by the Architect or Engineer, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work.
C. At the time of each shop drawing submission, the Contractor shall call the Engineer's attention (in writing) to, and plainly mark on shop drawings, any deviations from the Contract Documents. (See Paragraph 1.06, B.)
D. Samples, drawings, specifications, and catalogs submitted for approval shall be properly labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used, location, section and article number of specifications governing, Contractor's name, and name of job. All equipment shall be labeled to match labeling on contract documents.
E. Control Systems: Submit description of operation and schematic drawings of the entire control system. Include bulletins describing each item of control equipment or component.
F. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which approval is being requested, shall be specific and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc. of item submitted shall be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted.
G. Approval rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are approved, said approval does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the contract drawings and specifications.
H. All shop drawings shall be submitted to the A/E by Contractor no later than 30 days from the day of contract award.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
I. Failure of the Contractor to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle him to an extension of contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.
J. Submit all Division 15 submittals at one time in one integral group. Piece-by-piece submission of individual items will not be acceptable. Engineer may check contents of each submittal set upon initial delivery; if not complete as set forth herein, submittal sets may be returned to Contractor without review and approval and will not be accepted until made complete.
K. Routing and methods of support of piping shall be shown on shop drawings and shall have the review of the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. Spacing of supports shall be as specified in Section 15140, or if not specified, shall not exceed the suggested maximum spacing recommended in ANSI B31.1 for each type of line. Supports shall be fabricated as detailed on reviewed shop drawings. Provide supports so located that temporary supports are not required during removal of valves or equipment. Insofar as possible, support lines directly from Building structure.
L. At the close of the job, prior to final review, five (5) bound copies of the following shall be submitted by transmittal letter to the Engineer for review and acceptance:
1. Equipment warranties;
2. Contractor's warranty;
3. Parts list and manuals for all equipment;
4. Balance and test readings;
5. Operating instructions (in writing);
6. Written instructions on maintenance and care of the system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Manufacturer's published technical data, catalog cuts, wiring diagrams, shop drawings, samples and testing and balancing logs for all elements of the HVAC work. Submit under provisions of General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. No equipment, piping, ductwork or components shall be fabricated, delivered, erected, or connected other than from shop drawings reviewed and approved by the Engineer.
C. It shall be understood that review of shop drawings by the Engineer does not supersede the requirement to provide a complete and functioning system in compliance with the Contract Documents.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
D. Equipment Supports: Submit detailed shop drawings indicating equipment weight and dimensions, support material, connections, anchoring, and vibration isolation.
E. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1. All equipment; cooling, heating, plumbing, electrical motors, starters, controls, etc.
2. Voltage, phase, and amps of each electrical item, such as motors, etc.
3. All auxiliary equipment.
4. Pipe, ductwork, valves, insulation, etc.
1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Materials and equipment are specified herein by a single or by multiple Manufacturers to indicate quality and performance required. The drawings are based upon equipment scheduled on drawings and specified. If another Manufacturer is considered for substitution during the bidding process, the Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all electrical, mechanical, structural, or architectural changes. Comparable equipment Manufacturers which are listed below equipment indicated as “Basis of Design” shall be considered as substitutes. Manufacturers other than the Basis of Design shall submit catalog information and 1/4" scale plan and section drawings showing proper fit and all clearances for maintenance items.
B. Substitutions of other Manufacturer's will be considered for use if, in the Engineers opinion, the item requested for substitution is equal to that specified. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a typed comparative list of the basis of design and the proposed substitute. The comparative shall list capacities, pressure drops, horse power, electrical requirements, etc., (refer to Paragraphs 1.04.C and 1.06.C).
Request for approval of substitutions shall be made in writing no less than ten (10) days (unless otherwise directed in Division 1) prior to bid. Substitutions shall not be considered approved unless the approval appears in an Addendum or unless so named in the specifications as a pre-approved substitute. The approval of any substitutions or equals prior to bid shall not be construed as a shop drawing approval. The substitute or equal must be submitted as described in the specifications and meet all the requirements of the specifications and drawings.
C. All requests for substitutions shall be submitted as described in paragraph 1.06, B., and specifically indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product specified as basis of design and the product proposed for substitution. Differences shall include, but shall not be limited to, data as follows for both the specified and substituted products.
Principle of operation;
Materials of construction or finishes;
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
Thickness or gauge of materials;
Weight of item;
Deleted features or items;
Added features or items;
Changes in other Contractor's work caused by the substitution;
Physical dimensions;
Electrical requirements.
D. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the drawing, which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, or any other part of the mechanical or electrical, all such redesign, and all new drawings and detailing required therefore, shall be prepared by the Subcontractor at his own expense and submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval.
E. Where such approved deviation requires quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.07 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Give full cooperation to other trades and furnish in writing to the General Contractor, with copies to the Architect, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
B. When work installed under this Division will be in close proximity to, or will interfere with work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If so directed by the Engineer/Architect, prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less than 1/4" = 1'0", clearly showing how work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. If the work is installed before coordinating with other trades, or so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, make all the necessary changes in work to correct the condition without extra charge.
C. Furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans, and shop details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect all work and material provided under this Division from damage. All damaged equipment work or material provided under this Division shall be replaced with new. Re-builts are not acceptable.
B. Protect all work and equipment until inspected, tested, and accepted. Protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which are not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.
1.09 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, AND HOISTING
A. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required.
1.10 REMOVAL OF RUBBISH
A. This Contractor shall at all times keep premises free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish caused by his employees or work. At completion of work he shall remove all his tools, scaffolding, materials, and rubbish from the building and site. He shall leave the premises and his work in a clean, orderly, and acceptable condition.
B. All plaster, concrete, cement, etc. shall be removed from all pipe, hangers, and equipment prior to painting and/or concealment.
1.11 SAFETY
A. This Contractor shall comply with Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.333), Title 29—Labor, Chapter XIII, Bureau of Standards, Department of Labor, Part 1518—Safety and Health Regulations for Construction; and that his housekeeping and equipment be maintained in such a manner that they comply with the Florida Industrial Commission Safety Code and Regulations of the Federal Williams—Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), wherein it states that the Contractor shall not require any laborer or mechanic employed in the performance of the contract to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health and safety.
1.12 SUPERVISION
A. This Contractor shall provide a competent, experienced, full time superintendent who is acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner, and who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.13 LUBRICATION
A. Where necessary, provide means for lubricating all bearings and other machine parts. If a part requiring lubrication is concealed or inaccessible, extend a lubrication tube with suitable fitting to an accessible location and suitably identify it.
B. After installation, properly lubricate all parts requiring lubrication and keep them adequately lubricated until final acceptance by the Owner.
1.14 VALVE CHARTS, TAGS, AND NAMEPLATES
A. Provide at a location designated by the Engineer and the Owner, a valve chart enclosed in an aluminum frame with clear plastic shield. Chart shall show the designated number of each valve, its location and service. Valve numbers shall be same as those shown on the "As-Built" drawings.
B. Each valve shown on the chart shall have a 1-1/2" diameter, 18 gauge brass tag with clearly visible stamped numbers, securely fastened to the valve stem or handle with a heavy brass hook or chain.
C. Each panel mounted switch, thermometer, gauge, or controller for fans, pumps, or other electrically operated equipment shall be clearly designated by a black plastic nameplate of size approved by the Engineer securely fastened with metal pins or screws to the panel directly under the item designated.
D. Refer to Section 15190 for additional information.
1.15 WIRING DIAGRAMS
A. Furnish for use under Division 16 all wiring diagrams as may be required for the installation of the wiring to insure proper operation and control of the equipment provided under this Division. Provide the diagrams in time to avoid delays.
1.16 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials and apparatus required for the work, except as specifically specified otherwise, shall be new, of first-class quality, and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be so selected and arranged as to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, a first-class standard article as approved by the Engineer shall be furnished. Refer to substitutions in this Section.
B. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the plans or specifications, all equipment and materials shall be installed with the approval of the Architect and Engineer in accordance with the recommendations of the Manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the Manufacturer recommends.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.17 QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION
A. All work shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer and the Owner. In case of moving machinery, sound, or vibration noticeable outside of room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room, will be considered objectionable. Sound or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Engineer and the Owner shall be corrected in an approved manner at no additional expense to the Owner. Vibration control shall be by means of approved vibration eliminators in a manner as specified in Section 15242.
1.18 ACCESSIBILITY
A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases, the adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for the proper installation of his work. He shall cooperate with all other Contractors whose work is in the same space, and shall advise them of his requirements. Such spaces and clearances shall, however, be kept to the minimum size required.
B. This Contractor shall locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully accessible positions. Equipment shall include but not be limited to, valves, traps, clean-outs, motors, controllers, switchgear, and drain points. If required for better accessibility, furnish access doors for this purpose. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility.
C. This Contractor shall provide the access panels for concealed mechanical equipment, valves, controls, dampers, or other device requiring service. (Refer to Paragraph 1.20 of this section.)
1.19 FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS, PIERS, AND ATTACHMENTS
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary foundations, supports, pads, bases and piers required for all air conditioning equipment, piping, pumps, tanks, compressors, and for all other equipment furnished under this Division, and shall submit drawings to the Architect and Engineer for approval before purchase, fabrication or construction of same.
B. For pumps, compressors, and other rotating machinery, and for all equipment where foundations are indicated, provide concrete pads as shown. All pads shall be extended six inches (6") beyond machine base in all directions with top edge chamfered. Inset six inch (6") steel dowel rods into floors to anchor pads. All pads shall have a minimum of 6 x 6 W2.9/W2.9 WWF unless otherwise noted. Shop drawings of all foundations and pads shall be submitted to the Architect and Engineer for approval before same are constructed.
C. Construction of foundations, supports, pads, bases, and piers where mounted on the floor, shall be the same materials and same quality of finish as the adjacent and surrounding flooring material.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
D. All equipment, unless shown otherwise, shall be securely attached to the building structure in an approved manner. Attachments shall be of a strong and durable nature and any attachments that are, in the opinion of the Architect and the Engineer, not strong enough shall be replaced as directed.
1.20 ACCESS DOORS FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Provide flush panel access doors with a 16 gauge steel frame and a 14 gauge steel door panel.
B. Finish is to be primed painted steel.
C. Provide concealed hinges which allow the door to open 175 degrees and have a removable pin.
D. Provide access doors with a locked flush mounted vandal proof spanner head operated steel cams.
E. Provide 1-1/2 hour "B" label door for rated chase walls.
F. Furnish masonry anchors for installation in masonry walls and metal lath wings with casing bead for plaster installation.
G. Provide a minimum 2'-0" by 2'-0" access doors unless shown or noted otherwise on the drawings.
H. Access doors for chase walls shall be mounted 16" off the finish floor.
I. Access doors for mechanical equipment shall be a minimum of 12" larger than equipment all around.
1.21 VALVE BOXES
A. All exterior underground valves shall be provided with exterior valve boxes equipped with removable covers appropriately labeled.
B. Valve boxes shall be manufactured of reinforced fiberglass plastic or heavy duty PVC as approved by the Architect/Engineer, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
1.22 WELDING
A. Welded pipe joints shall be made by the oxyacetylene or electric process in accordance with the Code of Pressure Piping ASA B31.1.
B. Welding shall be done with good quality modern welding equipment, by competent operators, and in thorough, first class manner, conforming to AWS Standards.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-9 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. The Contractor shall be required to furnish proof of the competency of each welding operator for both field and shop welds and shall at the request of the Architect/Engineer have all or any of such welding operators pass a standard qualification test such as ASME, AWS, or Hartford Insurance Company procedure and tests.
D. Filler-metal for the welding process shall conform to ASTM A233 "Specification for Mild Steel Arc-Welding Electrodes". Classification of electrodes shall be one of the following: E6010, E6015, E7016, E7018.
E. When welding is to be performed, precautionary measures must be taken to prevent fire. Remove flammable materials and debris from the area. Provide an appropriate extinguisher nearby.
F. Pipes shall be cut short and cold sprung into place before welding or fabricating to compensate for expansion of lines when hot.
G. Welds shall be of the single vee butt type. Pipe end shall be shop beveled to 45 degrees to within 1/16 inch of the inside wall surface.
H. The abutting ends of the joints shall be separated before welding to permit complete fusion, tacked in two or more points to maintain alignment, and welded. Welding shall be continuous around the pipe.
I. Welds shall be of sound weld metal, thoroughly fused into the ends of the pipe and to the bottom of the vee, and shall be built up in excess of the pipe wall to give a reinforcement of one-quarter (1/4) the pipe wall thickness and in such a manner that one weld metal will present a gradual increase in thickness from the surface of the pipe to the center of the weld. The minimum width of the weld shall be 2-1/2 times the pipe wall thickness.
J. The fillet welds from the flanges of fittings shall be fused into the pipe and plate for minimum distance of 1-1/2 times the pipe wall thickness and shall be built up to present a minimum throat thickness of depth of weld of 1-1/4 times the pipe wall thickness.
K. Branch connections shall be fabricated by welding. Openings cut into pipe for welded connections shall be accurately made to give carefully matched intersections and welding fittings shall be carefully welded into the pipe system.
L. Welding ells shall be used at all turns in welded pipe lines; no mitered ells will be approved.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-10 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
M. Where branch piping is three times smaller than the main, branch connections shall be made up with the appropriate manufactured weld-on fitting. Welded tees shall be used for all other branch connections, unless otherwise approved by the Architect/Engineer for a specific case.
1. Approved Manufacturers
a. Allied Piping Products.
b. Bonney Forge.
c. Branch Connections.
d. Branchlets.
e. Tube Turn.
f. Thread-O-Lets.
N. Welds in piping shall be annealed after welding to remove the welding strains. The temperature need not exceed that causing a dull red, and shall be uniform around the pipe. Welds made in place shall be annealed, but the pipe shall be free to expand and shall be properly supported so as to avoid stresses. Annealing shall always be followed by slow cooling.
1.23 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable Codes and Standards as follows:
1. Standard
a. Certain standard materials and installation requirements are described by reference to standard specifications. These standards are as follows:
ASA ...... American Standards Association.
ASTM ...... American Society for Testing Materials.
ASME ...... American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code of Unfired Pressure Vessels.
NEMA ...... National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
UL ...... Underwriters Laboratories.
ANSI ...... American National Standards Institute.
ASHRAE ...... American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-11 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SMACNA ..... Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association.
AMCA ...... Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
ARI ...... Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
AMA ...... Acoustical Materials Association.
For additional standards and requirements see other sections of the specifications.
Whenever a reference is made to a standard, installation and materials shall comply with the latest published edition at the time project is bid unless otherwise specified herein.
2. Codes and Rules
a. All material furnished and all work installed shall comply with the following codes as they apply to this project:
National Electric Code.
Regulations of the Florida Industrial Commission Concerning Safety.
Applicable County, State and Local Building Codes.
Local and State Fire Marshal Rules and Regulations.
Occupational Safety and Health Agency Standards (OSHA).
Florida State Board of Health Rules and Regulations.
Florida Building Code—Mechanical.
Chapter 4A-47, Florida Administrative Code - Uniform Fire Safety Standards for Elevators.
State Requirements for Educational Facilities (SREF), Chapter 4, Section 423, of the Florida Building Code.
Applicable codes shall be those adopted by the authority having jurisdiction at the time project is bid.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-12 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3. Permits, Fees And Inspections
a. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government fees, sales taxes and other costs, including utility connections or extensions, in connection with this work; file all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction.
b. Obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver to the Owner/Engineer the same certificates before request for acceptance and final payment for the work.
c. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings required to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations.
d. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any work or materials which conflict with any of the applicable codes, standards, laws and regulations before submitting his bid.
1.24 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The scope of the work included under this Division of the Specifications shall include complete mechanical systems as shown on the plans and as specified herein. The General Conditions and Special Conditions of these specifications shall form a part and be included under this Section of the Specifications. Provide all supervision, labor, material, equipment, machinery, plant, and any and all other items necessary to complete the mechanical systems. All items of equipment are specified in the singular; however, provide and install the number of items of equipment as indicated on the drawings, and as required for complete systems.
B. Systems shall include all appurtenances as required to achieve the operating conditions as shown and specified and shall result in a superior installation.
C. All electrical work required to support mechanical equipment or is otherwise necessary to operate mechanical equipment, shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor (including, but not limited to) electrical motors for all motor- operated equipment required under this Division, motor controllers, all starters not provided by the Electrical Contractor (coordinate with Electrical Contractor), pilot lights and relays, line and low voltage control wiring, raceways, connections to switches, and other electrical devices furnished with temperature control systems except as otherwise provided for in other Divisions of this Specification.
D. All starters furnished by the Mechanical Contractor shall meet all requirements specified in Section 16480.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-13 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
E. Any equipment submitted for prior approval shall be submitted with the following written information specifically for the submitted project application: specific model numbers, dimensional data, performance data and other data as requested by the Engineer. General or ambiguous submittals will not be considered for prior approval.
1.25 REMOVALS, RELOCATIONS, RECONNECTIONS, AND RESTORATIONS
A. Demolition of existing piping, equipment, etc., shall be done as indicated on the Drawings. Existing piping and/or equipment to be removed shall be offered to the Owner. If the Owner wishes to utilize the existing equipment elsewhere, this Contractor shall move the equipment to a site designated by the Owner. All material to be removed shall be discarded by the Contractor and they shall not be used again.
B. All demolition work shall be completely coordinated with the Owner. Demolition and reconnections requiring shut-down of existing systems shall be scheduled with the Owner/Engineer. If shut-down can only be accommodated on the weekend, or after normal working hours, such work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner. If it is not possible to schedule sufficient Owner coordinated and approved downtime to complete the entire demolition and reconnection scope such that all or a part of the facility’s service(s) will be disrupted, affecting the normal business operation of the facility (i.e., loss of HVAC or plumbing), the Contractor shall provide temporary accommodations (i.e., temporary HVAC or portable toilets, etc), for the duration of the shutdown at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Location, capacity, size, etc. of existing equipment, piping, etc., was obtained from field survey and as built drawings. Verify all conditions at site prior to commencing with work. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies prior to starting work or ordering material.
D. Survey existing facilities and utilities as necessary to determine location of shut-off or disconnect devices, drains, vents, etc. Drain, refill, and purge existing water piping circuits to make new piping connections. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify the existing piping and identify which is supply and return, chilled water, and hot water, prior to starting demolition for new piping connections.
E. Temporarily store all items to be relocated, if required. Contractor shall be responsible for safe storage of all such items and shall replace any items lost or damaged during storage removal or reinstallation.
1.26 PROJECT/SITE CONDITION
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions, including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Owner/Engineer before proceeding.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-14 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.27 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. For requirements for trenching and backfilling, refer to Division 2.
1.28 CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS
A. This Contractor shall furnish Operating and Maintenance (O&M) manuals and As- built drawings before final payment will be issued.
1. O&M manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements, and shall consist of the following (at a minimum):
a. All Contractor and Manufacturer warranties.
b. List of Contractors and Parts and Equipment Suppliers—complete with contact person, proper company name, address, and telephone numbers.
c. Parts list for supplied equipment—including a checklist of recommended components to be stocked on-site.
d. Maintenance and replacement parts manuals.
e. Start-up and shutdown operating instructions.
f. Manufacturer’s literature describing the equipment, which shall include wiring diagrams and operating specifications.
g. Control system sequence of operation, system diagram, and backup disks of the system configuration.
h. Copies of final test and balance reports.
2. The Contractor shall provide AutoCAD as-built drawings and copies of each AutoCAD file on CD before final payment will be issued.
1.29 EXISTING CONDITIONS—EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. For purposes of this Contract, the assumption during bidding is that any and all existing fire alarm, intercom, security, lighting, electrical systems, etc., are complete and operating properly.
B. Before commencing any work on fire alarm, security alarm, energy management, intercom, lighting, or electrical systems, or any work which affects them, the Specialty Contractor shall examine such systems thoroughly. If this Contractor finds any portion of any system not functioning fully and properly, he shall notify the Project Architect/Engineer (PA/E) and the Owner in writing exactly and precisely which item(s) are not working. (This paragraph does not require diagnosis as to why such item(s) are not working nor the repair of such.)
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-15 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Upon notification to the Owner, the PA/E and Owner shall verify whether such report is accurate. If found not accurate, the PA/E and the Owner shall demonstrate such to this Contractor. If the report is found accurate, the Owner may either:
1. Correct such deficiencies with his own Maintenance forces or by employing another Specialty Contractor.
2. Require of the Contractor for this construction project a proposal sum to thoroughly diagnose the cause of such deficiencies and the specifying of precise corrective action needed.
3. Upon receipt of such proposal sum, the Owner may elect to employ the Contractor, by Change Order, to effect such corrections; or, with the Contractor’s approval, employ the Contractor’s appropriate Specialty Contractor directly by Purchase Order, to effect such corrections; or the Owner may achieve corrections to the system by other means.
D. However, upon commencing any work under this Contract on fire alarm, security alarm, energy management, lighting, intercom, or electrical systems under this Construction Contract, this Contractor has accepted the systems as complete and functioning properly. From the time of commencing work on such systems, they become the responsibility of this Contractor to maintain and keep functional through the Date of Final Substantial Completion. If, at the time of Final Substantial Completion, such a system or portion of such system is found not to be functioning properly, such item shall be listed on the “punchlist” and shall be corrected by this Contractor. Once corrected, inspected by the PA/E and Owner, and found to be functioning properly, the item shall be removed from the “punchlist” as satisfied.
E. The guarantees, warranties, and obligations of this Contractor for this work under this Contract shall not be extended to include the existing fire alarm, security alarm, other alarm systems, intercom, lighting, energy management and electrical systems beyond the date of final acceptance of the work under this Contract.
1.30 PAINTING
A. Provide painting and touch-up painting of all exposed piping, ductwork, support structures, etc., and all unfinished equipment (concealed or exposed). Refer to Section 15190 for color scheme requirements of pipes and identification markers.
B. Deliver materials to job site in new, original, and unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name, trade name, and label analysis. Store where indicated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist or when relative humidity exceeds 85%. Do not apply paint to damp or wet surfaces.
D. Protect work of other trades. Correct any painting related damages by cleaning, repairing, or replacing, and refinishing, as directed by Engineer.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-16 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
E. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers where required. Notify Engineer in writing of anticipated problems using specified coatings with substrate primed by others.
F. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions for each substrate condition.
G. Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted or provide surface-applied protection. Re-install removed items and remove protective coverings at completion of work.
H. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, and similar materials to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease and oils, and by roughing to remove glaze. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted before beginning painting. Do not paint over surfaces where alkalinity or moisture content exceeds manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Clean ferrous surfaces which are not galvanized or shop-coated. Remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged. Clean galvanized surfaces free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent. Completely paint all welds prior to application of insulation or other protective covering. Non-insulated piping shall be painted entirely.
J. Mix, prepare, and store painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators, and techniques best suited for materials and surfaces to which applied.
K. Application
1. Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators, and techniques best suited for materials and surfaces to which applied.
2. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final paint coat, until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
3. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, flat, non-specular black.
4. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinges covers to match exposed surfaces. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Sand lightly between succeeding enamel or varnish coats.
6. Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-17 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
7. Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to provide a total dry film to thickness of not less than 4.0 mils for an entire coating system of prime and finish coats for 3-coat work.
8. Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils for entire coating system of prime and finish coat for 2-coat work.
9. Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
L. Exterior Paint Schedule
1. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry: (other than concrete masonry units.) Lusterless (flat) Acrylic Finish: 2 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 1.5 mils.
First and Second Coats: Acrylic Emulsion (FS TT-P-19) Scott ...... 420 100% Acrylic Supercoat. Devoe ...... 15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint Glidden ...... Y3525 Spread Glide-on Moore ...... Moorglo House and Trim Paint Pittsburgh ...... 6-610 Speedhide Acrylic Latex House Paint P & L ...... Pro-Hide Plus Latex House Paint S-W ...... Weather Perfect Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish
2. Concrete Masonry Units: Lusterless (flat) Acrylic Finish: 2 coats over filler coat with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils, excluding filler coat. Filler Coat: Solvent Thinned Block Filler for Porous Surfaces (FS TT-F- 1098) Scott ...... 130 Scot-Kote Acri-Vinyl Latex Block-fil Devoe ...... 52901 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Block Filler Glidden ...... Y-5317 Ultra-Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler Moore ...... Moore's Waterproofing Masonry Paint S-W ...... Pro-Mar Block Filler
First and Second Finish Coats: Acrylic Emulsion (FS TT-P-19). Scott ...... 420 100% Acrylic Supercoat Devoe ...... 15XX Wonder Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint Glidden ...... Y3515 Spread Glide-on Moore ...... Moorgard Latex House Paint S-W ...... Weather Perfect Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-18 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3. Zinc-Coated Metal:
High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 Finish coats over primer
Prime Coat: Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide Primer (FS TT-P-641) Scott ...... 914 Industrial Finish Zinc Chromate Primer Devoe ...... 14100 Zinc Dust Primer and Finish Glidden ...... Y-5229 Glid-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer Pittsburgh ...... 6-125 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer S-W ...... S-W Galvanized Iron Primer
4. Aluminum:
High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 Finish coats over primer
Prime Coat: Zinc Chromate Primer (FS TT-P-645) Scott ...... 914 Industrial Finish Zinc Chromate Primer Devoe ...... 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer Glidden ...... Y-5229 Glid-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer Moore ...... Iron-Clad Zinc Chromate Primer Pittsburgh ...... 6-204 PPG Zinc Chromate Primer P & L ...... Noxide Zinc Chromate Primer S-W ...... S-W Zinc Chromate Primer
First and Second Finish Coats: High Gloss Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-489, Class A) Scott ...... 550 Polythane Alkyd Polyurethan Gloss Enamel Devoe ...... 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel Glidden ...... Y-4500-Line - Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel Moore ...... Moore's Impervo High-Gloss Enamel Interior/Exterior Pittsburgh ...... 6-252 PPG Alkyd Gloss Enamel P & L ...... Effecto Enamel S-W ...... S-W Metalistic II Enamel
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-19 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
M. Interior Paint Schedule 1. Concrete and Masonry: (other than concrete masonry units) Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 Coats with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils.
First Coat: Interior Flat Latex Base Paint (FS TT-P-29) Scott ...... 120 Scot-Kote Acri-Vinyl Latex Primer Devoe ...... 33XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint Glidden ...... Y-5019 Ultra-Hide PVA Primer Seal Moore ...... Moore's Latex Quick-dry Prime Seal Pittsburgh ...... 6-70 Speedhide Latex Flat Wall Paint P & L ...... Pro-Hide Plus Latex Flat S-W ...... S-W Wall and Wood Primer
Second Coat: High Gloss Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-489, Class A) Scott ...... 500 Scot-Kote Alkyd Enamel Undercoater Devoe ...... 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat Moore ...... Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody Pittsburgh ...... 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater P & L ...... Pro-Hide Plus Latex Flat S-W ...... S-W Wall and Wood Primer
Third Coat: Odorless Interior Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509) Scott ...... 540 Scot-Glo Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel Devoe ...... 26XX Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel Glidden ...... Y-4600 Line Spread Luster Semi-Gloss Enamel Moore ...... Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel Pittsburgh ...... 17-109 Wall-Hide Semi-Gloss Enamel P & L ...... Pro-Hide Plus Alkyd Semi-Gloss S-W ...... S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-20 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2. Concrete Masonry Units:
Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: 2 Coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat.
Filler Coat: Solvent-Thinned Block Filler (FS TT-P-1098). Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. Scott ...... 130 Scot-Kote Acri-Vinyl Latex Primer Devoe ...... 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Flat Latex Block Filler Glidden ...... Y-5317 Line Ultra-Hide Acrylic Block Filler Moore ...... Moore's Waterproofing Masonry Paint S-W ...... S-W Pro-Mar Block Filler
First Coat: Enamel Undercoater (FS TT-E-543) Scott ...... 500 Scot-Kote Alkyd Enamel Undercoater Devoe ...... 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat Glidden ...... Y-5019 - PVA Primer Moore ...... Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody S-W ...... S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel
Second Coat: Odorless Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-509) Scott ...... 540 Scot-Kote Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel Devoe ...... 26XX Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel Moore ...... Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel S-W ...... S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel
3. Gypsum Drywall Systems:
Odorless Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
First Coat: Interior Latex Base Primer Coat (FS TT-P-650) Scott ...... 120 Scot-Kote Acri-Vinyl Latex Primer Devoe ...... 50801 Wonder-tones Latex Primer and Sealer Glidden ...... Y-3416 - Spread Primer Sealer Moore ...... Moore's Latex Quick-Drying Interior Latex Primer Sealer S-W ...... S-W Pro-Mar Latex Wall Primer
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-21 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
Second and Third Coats: Odorless Interior Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509) Scott ...... 540 Scot-Glo Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel Devoe ...... 26XX Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel Glidden ...... Y-4600-Line - Sped Luster Semi-Gloss Moore ...... Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel Pittsburgh ...... 27-109 Wall-Hide Semi-Gloss Enamel P & L ...... Pro-Hide Plus Alkyd Semi-Gloss S-W ...... S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel
4. Plaster:
Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Finish: 2 Coats
First and Second Coats: Acrylic Emulsion (FS TT-P-19) Scott ...... 410 100% Acrylic Supercoat Flat Devoe ...... 15XX Wonder-Shield Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint Glidden ...... Y-3525 - Line Spread Glide-on Pittsburgh ...... 6-610 Speedhide Acrylic Latex House Paint P & L ...... Pro-Hide Plus Latex House Paint S-W ...... S-W Wall and Wood Primer
5. Ferrous Metal:
Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
Prime Coat: Red Lead Base Primer (FS TT-P-86). Prime coat is not required on items delivered shop primed. Scott ...... 914 Industrial Finish Zinc Chromate Primer Devoe ...... 41821 Bar-ox Red Metal Primer Glidden ...... Y-5532 - Glid-Guard Red Lead Metal Primer Moore ...... Iron-Clad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint Pittsburgh ...... 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater P & L ...... Interior Trim Primer
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-22 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
First Coat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543) Scott ...... 540 Scot-Glo Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel. Devoe ...... 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat Glidden ...... Y-4600 Series Spread Luster Semi-Gloss Enamel Moore ...... Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody Pittsburgh ...... 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater P & L ...... Interior Trim Primer S-W ...... S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-gloss
Second Coat: Odorless Interior Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509) Scott ...... 540 Scot-Glo Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel Devoe ...... 26XX Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel Glidden ...... Y-4600-Line - Sped Luster Semi-Gloss Moore ...... Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel Pittsburgh ...... 27-109 Wall-Hide Semi-Gloss Enamel P & L ...... Pro-Hide Plus Alkyd Semi-Gloss S-W ...... S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel
6. Zinc-Coated Metal:
Semi-Gloss Finish: 2 Coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
Prime Coat: Zinc Dust - Zinc Oxide Primer Coating (FS TT-P-641). Scott ...... 914 Industrial Finish Zinc Chromate Primer Devoe ...... 14100 Zinc Dust Primer and Finish Glidden ...... Y-5229 Glid-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer Moore ...... Iron-Clad Galvanized Metal Primer Pittsburgh ...... 6-215/6-216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Paint Zinc Dust S-W ...... S-W Galvanized Iron Primer
Second Coat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543) Scott ...... 500 Scot-Kote Alkyd Enamel Undercoater Devoe ...... 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat Glidden ...... Y-4600 Line Spread Luster Semi-Gloss Enamel Moore ...... Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody Pittsburgh ...... 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater S-W ...... S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-23 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
Third Coat: Odorless Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel (FS TT-P-509) Scott ...... 540 Scot-Glo Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel Devoe ...... 26XX Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel Glidden ...... Y-4600 Line Spread Luster Semi-Gloss Enamel Moore ...... Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel Pittsburgh ...... 17-109 Wall-Hide Semi-Gloss Enamel S-W ...... S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel
*** END OF SECTION ***
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-24 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15140
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe, Duct, and Equipment Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors.
B. Equipment Bases and Supports.
C. Sleeves and Seals.
D. Flashing and Sealing Equipment and Pipe Stacks.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15260 ...... Piping Insulation.
C. Section 15410 ...... Plumbing Piping.
D. Section 15510 ...... Hydronic Piping.
E. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
1.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings on products and methods of pipe supports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. B-Line Systems.
B. Grinnell.
C. F and S.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.02 PIPE AND DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring (copper plated for copper pipe, hot dipped galvanized coating on non-copper pipe).
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis (copper plated for copper pipe, hot dipped galvanized coating on non-copper pipe).
C. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger (hot dipped galvanized coating.)
D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp; adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. Refer to drawings for special support details.
G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp (at each floor).
H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
I. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
J. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
K. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.
L. Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe covering protective saddles.
M. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non- conducting saddles in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness.
N. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
O. Offset Pipe Clamp: Carbon steel, hot dipped galvanized finish (copper plated for copper pipe) for supporting vertical pipe away from wall.
P. Refer to drawings for additional supports.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.03 HANGER RODS
A. Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. Hanger rods shall be zinc plated steel.
2.04 INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
2.05 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 22 gage galvanized steel.
B. Lead Flashing: 5 lb/sq.ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; one lb/sq.ft. sheet lead for soundproofing.
C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
2.06 SLEEVES
The following are the minimum acceptable requirements for this project. Refer to the plans for more stringent methods and requirements.
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, unless otherwise directed on the drawings with a more stringent requirement.
B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Walls or Footings. Form with steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel, unless otherwise directed on the drawings with a more stringent requirement.
C. Sleeves through outside walls shall be made with 18 gauge galvanized steel and fitted with chrome escutcheon covers at all finished surfaces.
D. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL Listed. Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s UL approved methods for firesafing all types required for the project as coordinated with the methods of floor and wall construction. Refer to the plans for further requirements.
E. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
F. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
G. Caulk: Silicone sealant of top quality.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
2.08 MATERIAL/FINISH
A. General Locations: Steel pipe hangers, miscellaneous steel supports, hardware, bolts, washers, nuts, screws, etc., not specified to be plated or coated shall be hot dipped galvanized with a minimum of 1.50 oz/ft. on all sides and all field cuts shall be zinc coated.
B. Located In or Around Cooling Tower Yards: Pipe hangers, equipment supports, miscellaneous structure components, hardware, bolts, washers, nuts, screws, etc., shall be non-metallic polyester resin, vinyl ester resin, fiberglass, glass reinforced polyurethane or 316 stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Support horizontal piping as follows:
PIPE SIZE (INCHES) MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING HANGER ROD DIAMETER 1/2 to 1-1/4 6'-6" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2 9'-0" 3/8" 2-1/2 to 3 10'-0" 1/2" 4 to 6 10'-0" 3/4" 8 to 12 14'-0" 7/8" 14 to 18 20'-0" 1" PVC (All Sizes) 4'-0" 3/8"
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers.
F. Support vertical piping at every floor and support from wall midway between ceiling and floor or at 12 feet maximum spacing, whichever is less. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor and at each hub.
G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.
H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
I. All auxiliary steel required for pipe supports shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. Where building structure is not usable for pipe supports, provide steel members, channels, angles, or "UNISTRUT" components for piping support. All auxiliary steel exposed to weather shall be galvanized.
J. Provide all steel required for support of pipes other than steel shown on structural Engineer's drawings.
K. Interior Pipe Guides, Expansion Loops, and Anchors: Provide pipe guides, expansion loops, and anchors on hot water heating pipes installed above the ceiling. Expansion loops shall be installed every 50 feet and supported from building structure with pipe guides on 10 feet spacing. Piping shall be anchored to the structure as necessary for directional expansion control.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3.03 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide equipment bases and supports of concrete type under all mechanical equipment and as shown on drawings.
B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
E. Refer to Section 15010, Paragraph 1.19, Foundations, Supports, Piers, Attachments, for additional requirements.
3.04 FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counterflash and seal.
C. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions for sound control.
3.05 SLEEVES
A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
B. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth and provide floor plate.
C. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk seal. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
D. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
E. Sleeves installed in exterior walls with exposed ends shall be non-corrosive type sleeves (i.e., stainless steel).
*** END OF SECTION ***
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15170
MOTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single Phase Electric Motors.
B. Three Phase Electric Motors.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
C. Section 16480 ...... Motor Control.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AFBMA 9—Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
B. AFBMA 11—Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
C. ANSI/IEEE 112—Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
D. ANSI/NEMA MG 1—Motors and Generators.
E. ANSI/NFPA 70—National Electrical Code.
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide manufacturers standard as supplied with respective equipment.
MOTORS 15170-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Service: Refer to Section 16480 for required electrical characteristics.
B. Motors: Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment, and for temperature rise in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, Service Factor, and motor enclosure type.
C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, Service Factor, Power Factor, efficiency.
D. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide conduit connection in end frame.
2.03 SINGLE PHASE POWER—SPLIT PHASE MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.
C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.
D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prefabricated sleeve or ball bearings.
E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.
2.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER—PERMANENT SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.
D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector.
2.05 SINGLE PHASE POWER—CAPACITOR STARTER MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
MOTORS 15170-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors shall have two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds.
F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve ball bearings.
G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.
2.06 THREE PHASE POWER—SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Between one and one and one-half times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.
C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pullout Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics.
D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors.
E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112, Test Method B. Load test motors to determine freedom from electrical or mechanical defects and compliance with performance data.
G. Motor Frames: NEMA standard T-frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.
H. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.
I. Sound Power Levels: To ANSI/NEMA MG 1.
J. Nominal Efficiency: Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112.
K. Motors for variable speed (PWM) application shall conform to NEMA Standard MGI-1993, Part 31.40.4.2 insulation integrity capable of withstanding 1600 maximum peak voltages with 0.1 microsecond rise from 10% to 90% of steady state voltage.
MOTORS 15170-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
L. Nominal Power Factor: Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112.
M. Motors with frame sizes 184T (5 HP) and larger shall be energy efficient type.
N. All motors shall be NEMA Premium Efficient Electric Motors according to the latest Energy Independence and Security Act or the following efficiencies per the attached schedule:
MOTOR HP MINIMUM EFFICIENCY
1-2 86.5 3-5 89.5 7.5 91.7 10 91.7 15 92.4 20-25 93.6 30 93.6 40-50 94.5 60 95 75-100 95.4 125-150 95.8 200 96.2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Motors drawing less than 250 Watts and intended for intermittent service may be germaine to equipment manufacturer and need not conform to these specifications.
B. Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where specifically noted otherwise.
C. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans shall be split phase type.
*** END OF SECTION ***
MOTORS 15170-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Identification of Mechanical Products Installed Under Division 15.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15260 ...... Piping Insulation.
C. Section 15280 ...... Equipment Insulation.
D. Section 15410 ...... Plumbing Piping.
E. Section 15510 ...... Hydronic Piping.
F. Section 15515 ...... Hydronic Specialties.
G. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A13.1—Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010 and Division 1.
B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. Refer to Section 15010, Paragraph 1.14.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010 and Division 1.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady.
B. Seton.
C. MSI.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Color: Unless specified otherwise, conform with ANSI/ASME A13.1.
B. Metal Tags: 18 gauge brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. Colors shall comply with ANSI A13.1. Size markers and letters as follows:
OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF LENGTH OF SIZE OF INSULATION OR PIPE COLOR FIELD LETTERS ¾" - 2" 1" x 8" ¾" 2½" - 6" 2¼" x 13" 1¾" 8" - 10" 4" x 24" 2½" Over 10" 4" x 32" 3½" Ductwork and Equipment All 3½"
D. Plastic Flagging Tape: 1-3/16” wide, bright orange.
E. Plastic Equipment Markers: 2" x 4", minimum 1/8" thick, corrosive and chemical resistant, black with white letters. Minimum size letter shall be 1/4". Air handler shall include quantity and sizes of filters required for a complete filter change. Fasten with stainless steel hardware.
F. Above Ceiling or Concealed Equipment Locator Markers: 1" x 3", minimum 1/8" thick, corrosive and chemical resistant, with engraved lettering of a highly visible contrasting color letters. Refer to chart below for marker colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Metal Tags: Install with heavy brass hook or chain.
B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Install complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Equipment: Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic equipment markers. Small devices, such as in- line pumps, may be identified with metal tags.
D. Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic equipment tags.
E. Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
F. Piping: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Tags may be used on small diameter piping. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and "T", at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
G. Ductwork: Identify ductwork with plastic equipment markers. Identify as to air handling unit number and service (supply air, return air, exhaust, outside air, etc.). Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
H. Ductwork Volume Dampers Above the Ceiling: Tie an orange tape flag, minimum 18” long, from each volume damper. Let tape hang down vertically.
3.03 VALVE CHART AND SCHEDULE
A. Provide valve chart and schedule in aluminum frame with clear plastic shield. Install at location as directed.
*** END OF SECTION ***
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15242
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Vibration Isolation.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15510 ...... Hydronic Piping.
C. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE—Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Indicate vibration isolator locations, with static and dynamic load on each, on shop drawings and described on product data.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
1.06 CERTIFICATES
A. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions that isolators are properly installed and properly adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements.
VIBRATION ISOLATION 15242-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Amber Booth.
B. Mason Industries.
C. Vibration Eliminator Co.
D. AVNEC Incorporated.
E. Kevflex.
2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Amber Booth—Model numbers listed are included for identification. Refer to Paragraph 2.01 for additional manufacturers.
B. Type BSR—A combination spring and rubber hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box, coil spring, spring retainers, and elastomeric mounting designed for approximately 1/2" deflection.
C. Flanged, Type 2800—A flanged spherical rubber expansion joint constructed of molded neoprene, nylon cord reinforced, with integral steel floating flanges, suitable for pressure up to 225# (4 to 1 safety factor) and temperatures up to 225°F. Connectors shall have minimum movement capability of 1/2” compression, 3/8” extension 1/2” lateral and 15° angular. Where allowable movements will be exceeded or where operating pressures exceed the following, control rods shall be installed at each connector to limit elongation to 3/8”.
through 4” ...... 200 psi 5” to 10” ...... 150 psi 12” to 14” ...... 100 psi 16” to 24” ...... 50 psi Control units shall be of the spring isolated design through 8” and neoprene isolated for 10” and larger to limit noise and vibration transmission through the control rods.
D. Type SP-NRE—A pad-type mounting consisting of two layers of 3/8" thick ribbed or waffled Neoprene pads bonded to a 16 gage galvanized steel separator plate. Pads shall be sized for approximately 20 to 40 psi load and a deflection of 0.12" to 0.16".
VIBRATION ISOLATION 15242-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
E. Type Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1- inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.
a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
b. Provide Spring Isolators on Piping Connected to Isolated Equipment as follows: Up to 4 inch diameter, first three points of support; 5 to 8 inch diameter, first four points of support; 10 inch diameter and over, first six points of support. Static deflection of first point shall be twice deflection of isolated equipment.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install vibration isolators and flexible connectors for the following motor driven equipment.
1. All Pumps—Type 2800—Flexible Connector (mount on supply and return piping).
2. Chillers, Condensing Units, and Chilled Water Air Handling Units—Type SP-NRE.
3. Split System Air Handling Unit and Power Ventilators—Type BSR.
4. Pumps 100 HP and Larger—Type Inertia Base.
B. Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. Adjust equipment level.
VIBRATION ISOLATION 15242-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Provide Spring Isolators on Piping Connected to Isolated Equipment as follows: Up to 4 inch diameter, first three points of support; 5 to 8 inch diameter, first four points of support; 10 inch diameter and over, first six points of support. Static deflection of first point shall be twice deflection of isolated equipment.
*** END OF SECTION ***
VIBRATION ISOLATION 15242-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15260
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Piping Insulation.
B. Jackets and Accessories.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15140 ...... Supports and Anchors.
C. Section 15190 ...... Mechanical Identification.
D. Section 15400 ...... Testing of Piping Systems.
E. Section 15410 ...... Plumbing Piping.
F. Section 15510 ...... Hydronic Piping.
G. Section 15515 ...... Hydronic Specialties.
H. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C552-79—Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
B. ANSI/ASTM C195—Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement.
C. ANSI/ASTM C547—Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.
D. ASTM B209—Aluminum and Aluminum-alloy Sheet and Plate.
E. ASTM C449—Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
F. ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723—Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
G. ASTM C1136—Vapor Retarders for thermal insulation.
PIPING INSULATION 15260-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with three (3) years minimum experience.
B. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, UL 723, and NFPA 255.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATION
A. Type A:
1. Impermeable, noncombustible, closed cellular glass insulation, conforming to ASTM C 552-79, "Specification for Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation."
2. Conductivity (k) equals approximately 0.29 (BTU-IN/HR, SF, degrees F) at 75 degrees F.
3. Joint sealants and coatings shall be as approved by the insulation manufacturer for the intended application and service temperature range.
4. Jacketing shall be approximately 125 mils thick, consisting of a bituminous resin reinforced with a woven, glass fabric, an integral aluminum foil layer, and a protective plastic film coating.
5. Approved Manufacturers and trade names:
a. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. "Foamglass Super K" with Pittseal, Pittcote, and Pittwrap.
b. Approved Equal.
PIPING INSULATION 15260-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Type B:
1. Closed cell, flexible foamed plastic conforming to ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, "Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form."
2. Conductivity (k) equals approximately 0.27 (BTU-IN/HR, SF, Degree F) at 75 degrees F.
3. Approved Manufacturers and trade names:
a. Armstrong "AP Armaflex"
b. Rubetex Corp. “Rubetex”
C. Type C:
1. Glass fiber, rigid molded sectional pipe covering conforming to ASTM C547, Class II, Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.
2. Conductivity (k) equals approximately 0.23 (BTU-IN/HR, SF, Degree F) at 75 degrees F.
3. Approved Manufacturers and Trade Names:
a. Manville Corp. "Micro-Lok 650-AP-T."
b. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. "One Piece 25 ASJ/SSL-II"
c. Certain-Teed "500 Degree Snap-On."
d. Knauf Fiberglass “Knauf Pipe Insulation, 850°F.”
2.02 JACKET
A. Interior Applications:
1. Vapor Barrier (ASJ) Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with double self-sealing adhesive joints.
2. Vapor Barrier (ASJ) Jackets: Metalized polyester film, reinforcing scrim, flame-retardant adhesive, and bleached paper with SSL. Butt strip tape coated with high performance, pressure sensitive, flame retardant adhesive.
B. Exterior Applications: (Exterior and other exposed areas such as equipment/ mechanical rooms)
1. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.016 inch thick; smooth finish with factory applied integral moisture barrier.
PIPING INSULATION 15260-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2. Aluminum Fitting Covers: Childers 2 or 4 piece ELL-JACS elbow covers, Gore ELL-JACS elbow covers and 2-piece TEE-JACS tee covers; ASTM B209; 0.024 inch thick; smooth finish.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.020 inch thick aluminum.
B. Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.020 inch thick aluminum.
C. Insulation Bonding Adhesive (to metal)
1. Benjamin Foster 85-15.
2. Childers Chil-Stix CP-85.
D. Insulating and Finishing Cement
1. Armco Corp.
2. Rockwool Corp.
3. Manville Corp.
E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive
1. Benjamin Foster 82-07.
2. Childers Chil-Stix CP-85.
F. Vapor Barrier Mastic
1. Benjamin Foster 30-35.
2. Childers CP-30 Low Odor (for indoor use).
3. Childers Chil-Pruf CP-22/23/24 (for outdoor use).
G. Lagging Adhesive
1. Benjamin Foster 30-36.
2. Childers Chil-Rene CP-96.
H. Glass Cloth Jacket
1. Benjamin Foster.
2. Childers Chil-Glas #10.
PIPING INSULATION 15260-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
I. PVC Fittings Covers
1. Certain-Teed "Snap Form."
2. Manville Corp. "Zeston."
3. Approved Equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Install materials after piping has been tested, cleaned, and approved, as required by Section 15400.
B. All surfaces to be insulated shall be dry and free of loose scale, rust, dirt, oil or water.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Insulation shall be installed in a smooth, clean, workmanlike manner. Joints shall be tight and finished smooth without fishmouths.
B. Insulation shall fit tightly against the surface to which it is applied to prevent air circulation between the insulation and the pipe or equipment to which it is applied.
C. Insulation applied to cold piping or equipment shall be completely vapor sealed, free of pin holes or other openings.
D. Do not use wet insulation materials.
E. All longitudinal joints on vertical pipe runs shall be staggered.
F. Apply insulation so as to permit expansion or contraction of pipe lines without causing damage to insulation or surface finish.
G. Do not apply mastic or adhesive until all previous application of mastic and adhesives have thoroughly dried.
H. The adhesive used in connection with all covering work shall contain an approved vermin and rodent-proof ingredient.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PIPING INSULATION 15260-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3.04 TYPE A INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Interior
1. Butter joints of Foamglass insulation with Pittseal 444 or Childers CP-76. Apply insulation to pipe and fittings with all joints tightly fitted. Secure with stainless steel wire so that each length of insulation shall be secured with two wires. Insulation shall be applied with all joints fitted to eliminate voids. Voids shall be eliminated by refitting or replacing insulation. Do not fill voids with joint sealer.
2. Finish with metalized polyester/scrim/bleached white Kraft or approved foil/scrim/bleached white Kraft, all service jacket (ASJ). Finish elbows and fittings with Pittcote 404 or Childers CP-30 Low Odor reinforced with white open weave membrane with maximum mesh opening of 10 x 10 per inch.
B. Exterior and Mechanical Equipment/Storage Rooms
1. Apply insulation as noted above (paragraph 3.04 A.1) and apply vapor barrier with Pittcote 404 or Childers CP-30 Low Odor reinforced with white open weave membrane with maximum mesh opening of 10 x 10 per inch. Then apply a second coat of Pittcote 404 or Childers CP-30 Low Odor and finish with .016 inch thick aluminum jacket. Elbows and tees shall be finished with preformed 0.024 inch thick aluminum fitting covers.
3.05 TYPE B INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Interior
1. Type B insulation shall be slipped on the pipe prior to connection, and the butt joints shall be sealed. Where the slip-on techniques is not possible, the insulation shall be carefully slit and applied to the pipe.
2. All joints shall be sealed with the Manufacturer's recommended adhesives.
3. Do not apply Type B insulation in multiple layers.
4. Type B insulation shall not be used in plenums nor fire wall penetrations.
5. This Contractor shall paint Type B insulation exterior to the building with two (2) coats of a vinyl lacquer paint recommended by the Insulation Manufacturer.
B. Exterior and Mechanical Equipment/Storage Rooms
1. Type B insulation shall be installed as described for interior except the pipe and fitting shall be covered with .016 inch thick aluminum jacket.
2. Elbows and tees shall be finished with preformed 0.024 inch thick aluminum fitting covers.
PIPING INSULATION 15260-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3.06 TYPE C INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Interior
1. Tightly butt together sections of insulation on pipe runs sealing longitudinal seams of jacket with vapor barrier adhesive. Seal end joints with four inch (4") wide straps of vapor barrier tape. Seal off ends of insulation with vapor seal mastic at valves, fittings, and flanges. No further finish required.
B. Exterior and Mechanical Equipment/Storage Rooms
1. PVC fitting jackets shall be used when they are available for the particular application.
3.07 HANGERS
A. Continue insulation through pipe hangers. Provide either rigid insulation inserts or sheet metal inserts at all outside pipe hangers. Provide rigid insulation inserts for piping operating below 60 degrees F and sheet metal inserts for piping above 60 degrees F.
B. Rigid insulation or wood inserts between the pipe and pipe hanger shall be of a thickness equal to the adjoining insulation and shall be provided with vapor barrier where required. Insulation insert shall not be less than the following lengths:
1/2" to 2-1/2" pipe size ...... 10" Long 3" to 6" pipe size ...... 12" Long 8" to 10 pipe size ...... 16" Long 12" and Over ...... 22" Long
C. Inserts for cold piping shall have a vapor barrier facing of the same material as the adjacent pipe insulation. Seal inserts into insulation with vapor seal mastic.
D. Where insulation is a load bearing material of sufficient strength to support the weight of the piping, pipe shields one-third the circumference of the insulation and of a length not less than three times the diameter of the insulation (maximum length 24") shall be provided. An all service jacket shall be applied between shields and insulation. Follow insulation manufacturer's recommendations for use of pipe insulation in conjunction with outside installed hangers.
E. Where insulation is not of sufficient strength to support the weight of the piping, a saddle, or section of calcium silicate insulation such as "Kaylo" shall be provided. Vapor barrier and finish shall be applied as required to match adjoining insulation. In addition, shields shall be furnished as specified above.
PIPING INSULATION 15260-7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3.08 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Pipe insulation and vapor barrier shall be continuous through sleeves in walls and floors.
B. Type B insulation shall not be used in sleeves through fire walls or fire rated (2 hour) floor systems. Use Type A or Type C through the sleeve instead and vapor seal the joint between the two (2) insulations.
C. Provide 26 gauge galvanized steel or 0.020 inch aluminum jacket over insulation on pipe passing through sleeves where sealant is required.
D. Where penetrating interior walls, extend the metal jacket 2 inches out either side of the wall and secure each end with a metal band compressing the insulation slightly.
E. Where penetrating floors, extend the metal jacket 2 inches below the floor and 5 inches above the floor. Secure with metal bands.
3.09 INSULATION SCHEDULE (ABOVE GRADE PIPING) A.
INSULATION TYPE SERVICE PIPE SIZE AND THICKNESS Exterior Chilled Water (including unconditioned All 2-1/2" Type A spaces and mechanical equipment rooms) Interior Chilled Water (Including Domestic) 2" or Less 1-1/2" Type A Interior Chilled Water 2-1/2" or More 2" Type A Refrigerant Suction Pipes and Coil Condensate All 3/4" Type B Lines (except in plenums or fire wall penetrations) Refrigerant Suction Pipes and Coil Condensate 1-1/4" or Less 1-1/2" Type A Lines (in plenums or fire wall or floor penetrations) Refrigerant Suction Pipes and Coil Condensate 1-1/4" or More 1-1/2" Type A Lines (in plenums or fire wall or floor penetrations)
*** END OF SECTION ***
PIPING INSULATION 15260-8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15280
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Equipment Insulation.
B. Covering.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15190 ...... Mechanical Identification.
C. Section 15260 ...... Piping Insulation.
D. Section 15400 ...... Testing of Piping Systems.
E. Section 15515 ...... Hydronic Specialties.
F. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C552—Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
B. Elastomeric Foam Insulation.
C. ASTM E84—Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D. NFPA 255—Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E. UL 723—Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in insulation application with three years minimum experience.
B. Insulation and Covering: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84. UL 723.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15280-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for equipment scheduled.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of these specifications.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesive and insulation
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Pittsburg Corning (Type A).
B. Rubatex (Type B).
C. Armstrong Armaflex (Type B).
2.02 INSULATION
A. Type A: Cellular glass; ANSI/ASTM C552; 'k' value of 0.29 at 75 degrees F; 8.5 lb/cu ft density. ASTM 84 flamespread.
B. Type B: Elastomeric foam insulation; 'k' value of 0.27 at 75 degrees F. ASTM 84 flamespread: less than 25; smoke developed: less than 50.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Bedding Compounds: Non-shrinking, permanently flexible, compatible with insulation.
B. Vapor Barrier Coating: Non-flammable, fire resistant, polymeric resin, compatible with insulation.
C. Insulating Cement: ANSI/ASTM C195, hydraulic setting mineral wool.
D. Wire Mesh: Corrosive-resistant metal; hexagonal pattern.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15280-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 15260, Paragraph 3.04, for additional instructions.
B. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.
D. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation, if necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with stainless steel wires or bands.
E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
F. Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of insulating cement.
G. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such.
H. When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage. Refer to detail on drawings for pump insulation requirements.
I. Flat or irregular equipment insulation shall be cut to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. All voids between equipment surface and insulation shall be packed with light density fiberglass.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A. Chiller Cold Surfaces—Type 'B'—3/4" thick (add insulation to all surfaces which exhibit condensation).
B. Chilled Water Pump Surfaces—Type 'A'—2" thick.
C. Air Separators, Strainers, Valve Bodies etc.—Type 'A'—2" thick.
D. All Equipment Operating Below Ambient Dew Point—Type 'A'—2" thick.
E. Air Inlets and Outlets—Refer to Section 15290.
*** END OF SECTION ***
EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15280-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15280-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15400
TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Hydronic Piping.
B. Domestic Water Piping.
C. Sanitary Piping.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15260 ...... Piping Insulation.
C. Section 15410 ...... Plumbing Piping.
D. Section 15510 ...... Hydronic Piping.
E. Section 15515 ...... Hydronic Specialties.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment required for testing procedures.
B. Insulation shall not be applied until pressure testing has been completed. Joints of any type shall not be painted or varnished prior to testing.
C. Lines containing check valves shall have the test pressure source located upstream of the valves, or the valve discs shall be removed until after the testing. Control valves shall be set in the open position, unless directed otherwise.
D. Pipe testing shall be performed after flushing, except for buried lines.
TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS 15400-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
E. Any equipment that has a pressure rating not as high as the testing pressure shall be valved off during the test.
F. The tabulated results of all tests shall be submitted to the A/E.
G. Potable hot and cold water lines shall be hydrostatically tested at 125 psig for a period of twenty-four (24) hours.
H. Soil waste, vent, and roof drain water lines shall be filled with water to the top of the system. Testing period shall be for a period of twenty-four (24) hours. Pipes or joints which leak shall be taken apart, remade, and re-tested.
I. Piping Systems: Test all pipe lines installed with a water pressure test of 1-1/2 times it's operating pressure, but not less than 100 psi for a period of 4 hours, during which time the pressure shall remain constant without pumping. If leaks or defects develop, new tests shall be made and repeated until all defects are remedied. Pipes or joints which leak shall be taken apart and remade. Caulking will not be permitted. Pipes which will be concealed may be tested separately before the distribution system is installed in order that these lines may be covered and furred in and thus, not delay the work of other trades.
*** END OF SECTION ***
TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS 15400-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Sanitary Sewer Piping System.
D. Domestic Water Piping System.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15140 ...... Supports and Anchors.
C. Section 15190 ...... Mechanical Identification.
D. Section 15260 ...... Piping Insulation.
E. Section 15400 ...... Testing of Piping Systems.
F. Section 15430 ...... Plumbing Specialties.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B16.29—Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings—DWV.
B. ANSI/ASTM B32—Solder Metal.
C. ASTM A74—Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
D. ASTM A-518—Acid Resistant Close Grained Cast Iron.
E. ASTM B88—Seamless Copper Water Tube.
F. ASTM C564—Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
G. AWWA C601—Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water.
PLUMBING PIPING 15410-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect at products site under provisions of General Conditions and supplementary General Conditions.
B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED AND ABOVE GRADE
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.02 COLD WATER PIPING, BELOW GRADE (OUTSIDE BUILDING)
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B52, solder, Grade 95TA.
2.03 COLD WATER PIPING, BELOW FLOOR (INSIDE BUILDING)
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, continuous tubing.
B. Fittings 5 feet outside of building shall be ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints ANSI/ASTM B32 solder, Grade 95TA.
C. Fittings are not permitted below floor. Fittings at equipment shall be compression type.
PLUMBING PIPING 15410-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.04 COLD WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
2.05 INSULATION
A. Refer to Section 15260.
2.06 VALVES—GENERAL
A. Materials for all valves shall be bronze.
2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—VALVES
A. Crane.
B. Grinnell.
C. Nibco.
D. Milwaukee.
2.08 GATE VALVES
A. Gate valves shall not be permitted.
2.09 GLOBE VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder ends, with backseating capacity. Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body bronze mounted with ends to suit pipe, yoke bonnet, and disc guide. Working pressure for bronze valves shall be 150 psi and iron valves 125 psi.
2.10 BALL VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends.
2.11 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, solder ends. Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body brass mounted and with ends to suit pipe. Working pressure for check valves shall be 125 pounds.
PLUMBING PIPING 15410-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.12 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, and single union.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with General Contractor.
H. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.
I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3 ft of cover, or as existing piping connections require.
J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900.
L. Copper piping installed below grade shall be wrapped with ¾” Armaflex pipe insulation. Seal all edges and seams to prevent moisture intrusion.
M. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients.
PLUMBING PIPING 15410-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
N. Excavate in accordance with sections on Excavation and Backfill.
O. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
Q. Pipe cold water to both hand mixing valves of sinks and lavatories when only cold water is designated for connection unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe.
D. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
3.04 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B. Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali or acid.
C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water.
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601.
*** END OF SECTION ***
PLUMBING PIPING 15410-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PLUMBING PIPING 15410-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15430
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Floor Drains.
B. Cleanouts.
C. Backflow Preventers.
D. Dielectric Fittings.
E. Hose Bibbs/Wall Hydrants.
F. Thermometers.
G. Shock Absorbers.
H. Vent Flashing.
I. Trap Primers.
J. Mixing Valves.
K. Escutcheons.
L. Water Pressure Reducing Valves.
M. T&P Relief Valves.
N. Washing Machine Drain Fittings.
O. Area Drains.
P. Hub Drains.
Q. Roof Drains.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15140 ...... Supports and Anchors.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Section 15400 ...... Testing of Piping Systems.
D. Section 15410 ...... Plumbing Piping.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASSE 1011—Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
B. ANSI/ASSE 1019—Wall Hydrants.
C. ANSI A112.21.1—Floor Drains.
D. ANSI A112.26.1—Water Hammer Arresters.
E. PDI WH-201—Water Hammer Arresters.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout, or as noted.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under Section 15010 General Conditions and supplementary General Conditions.
B. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 THERMOMETERS
A. Provide thermometers with needle type shut-off valves. They shall be installed so that they can be clearly read from the floor.
B. Industrial stem thermometers shall have a scale not less than 9" long and shall be red-reading mercury type with white background and black etched graduations and numerals.
C. Thermometers shall be suitable for the service intended and the range shall be selected to span from approximately 10 degrees below through 10 degrees above the operating range of the fluid.
D. Thermometers shall have a guaranteed accuracy of within 1% of the range scale and shall be provided with 1 degree graduations. Thermometers shall be provided with brass separable socket wells.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
E. Provide thermometer wells and necessary fittings where specified or indicated. Wells installed in insulated piping shall be provided with lagging extensions of appropriate length to accommodate insulation. Where wells are provided without thermometers or thermostats, a plug and chain shall be provided. The insertion length of wells shall be compatible with the pipe diameter in which they are installed. Wells shall be provided with graphite mixture.
F. Thermometers shall be as manufactured by Weksler, Marsh Instruments, or Ametek.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—BACKFLOW PREVENTERS (BFPR)
A. Hersey Products, Inc.
B. Watts Regulator Co.
C. Zurn Industries, Inc.
2.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS (BFPR)
A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
2.04 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Chrome plated or stainless steel with set screws for holding securely in place.
2.05 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Metal parts of union or flange shall be installed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. EPCO Dielectric pipe fittings or equivalent.
2.06 VENT FLASHING
A. 16 ounce copper or 4 pound lead flashing and counter flashing.
2.07 T&P RELIEF VALVES
A. Valve shall have bronze body, non-mechanical seat-to-disc alignment and shall have a stainless steel thermostat.
B. Valve shall contain an emergency back-up fusible plug.
C. The valves shall be sized on the AGA temperature steam rating.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.08 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Valves shall have bronze body, stainless steel integral strainer, renewable stainless steel seat, high temperature diaphragm and 160# gauge and tapping.
B. Valves shall be provided with built-in thermal expansion by-pass.
2.09 OTHER
A. Refer to the Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the drawings for further information.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations.
3.02 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install water hammer arresters complete with isolation valve. The water hammer arresters and isolation valve shall be installed in a location accessible through the ceiling. Provide access doors as necessary. Coordinate location of access doors with Architect/Engineer and other trades. Access door shall be sized to allow removal and replacement of concealed device or equipment.
E. Locate trap primer under lavatory on CW supply and/or flush valve as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
F. Use escutcheons on pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings of finished areas.
G. Seal all openings in sleeves for piping penetrations with UL listed caulk. Refer to detail on drawings.
*** END OF SECTION ***
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15510
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Chilled Water Piping System.
D. Condenser Water Piping System.
E. Heating Hot Water Piping System.
F. Cold Water Make-up.
G. Vents and Drains.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15140 ...... Supports and Anchors.
C. Section 15190 ...... Mechanical Identification.
D. Section 15260 ...... Piping Insulation.
E. Section 15280 ...... Equipment Insulation.
F. Section 15400 ...... Testing of Piping Systems.
G. Section 15515 ...... Hydronic Specialties.
H. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
I. Section 15975 ...... Building Management and Automatic Temperature Control System.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME—Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
HYDRONIC PIPING 15510-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. ANSI/ASME Sec 9—Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
C. ANSI/ASME B16.3—Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300.
D. ANSI/ASME B31.9—Building Services Piping.
E. ANSI/AWS A5.8—Brazing Filler Metal.
F. ANSI/AWS D1.1—Structural Welding Code.
G. ASTM A53—Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
H. ASTM A120—Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
I. ASTM A234—Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.
J. ASTM B32—Solder Metal.
K. ASTM B88—Seamless Copper Water Tube.
L. ANSI/AWWA C504—Rubber Sealed Butterfly Valves.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9, latest revision.
B. Conform to ANSI/AWWA C504, latest revision (below ground).
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010 and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
HYDRONIC PIPING 15510-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS—PIPE ABOVE GRADE
A. Chilled water, condenser water, make-up water, drains, and vents:
SIZES (INCHES) MATERIALS Pipe 2-1/2" and Larger Carbon steel, butt weld, Schedule 40 Pipe 2" and Smaller Type L, Hard Temper Copper Tubing Fittings Lines 2-1/2" and Carbon steel, butt weld, Schedule 40 Larger Fittings 2" and Smaller Wrought copper sweat Unions 2" and Smaller Brass Flanges 2-1/2" and Larger Carbon steel, slip on, raised face, 150 lbs. and 250 lbs. Gaskets "Graphoil", full face, 1/16", Union Carbide, or approved equal Air Conditioning Type L, Hard Temper Copper Tubing Condensate Drain
2.02 CONDENSER WATER, BELOW GRADE
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 80.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2466 or D2467, PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—VALVES
A. Stockham, Grinnell, Nibco, Milwaukee, and Mueller (unless noted otherwise).
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
2.04 BALL VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Full port, bronze two piece body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, and balancing stops, threaded ends. Provide extended handle shaft as necessary for installed thickness of insulation so that handle operates freely outside the insulation and jacket.
HYDRONIC PIPING 15510-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.05 BUTTERFLY VALVES LOCATED ABOVE GROUND
A. 2-1/2" through 4": 150 psi SWP iron body; butterfly valve; EPDM seat with phenolic resin hard backing; to have range of 300ºF; bronze disc; lug type; 416 stainless steel stem; luberized bronze reinforced Teflon bushing; infinite throttling handle with memory stop; suitable for dead-end service.
B. 5" through 10": 150 psi SWP iron body; butterfly valve; EPDM seat with phenolic resin hard backing; to have range of 300ºF; bronze disc; lug type; 304 stainless steel stem; luberized bronze reinforced Teflon bushing; series DG worm screw operator with handwheel suitable for deadend service.
C. Valves installed over 7'-0" above finished floor shall be provided with a chain wheel.
D. Gear operators exposed to weather shall have weatherproof cover.
E. Provide extended handle shaft as necessary for installed thickness of insulation so that handle operates freely outside the insulation and jacket.
2.06 CHECK VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, solder ends. 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged ends (horizontal piping).
B. 2-1/2" and Larger: iron body, bronze disc, stainless steel stem, stainless steel springs, Buna-N seat with 250ºF range, lug type valves.
2.07 BUTTERFLY VALVES LOCATED BELOW GROUND AND/OR SUBMERGED
A. 3" through 24": 150 psi tight-closing , rubber seated type conforming to the design standards of ANSI/AWWA C504. Valves shall be bubble tight at the rated pressure in either direction and shall be suitable for throttling service and/or operation after long periods of inactivity in buried soil and/or submerged up to 10 feet below water.
B. Manufacturer shall have manufactured this product and have proof of satisfactory installed history for a minimum of five (5) years and show proof of compliance with ANSI/AWWA C504. All valves shall be hydrostatic and leak tested in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C504.
C. Valve body shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A126, Class B, with ANSI B16.1 drilled flange. Disc shall be concentric design with aluminum bronze ASTM B148 UNS C95400, Grade C up to 8" and ductile iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45- 12 with 316 stainless edge above 8". Shaft shall be one piece through shaft of 18-8 stainless steel, corresponding to the requirements of AWWA C504, latest revision, and shall be fastened by a threaded disc pin and provide a positive leak proof connection of the shaft to the disc. Shaft bearings shall be of the self-lubricating, corrosion-resistant, sleeve type and be designed for horizontal and/or vertical shaft load. Packing shall be self adjusting and suitable for vacuum or pressure service.
HYDRONIC PIPING 15510-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
D. Valve seats shall be located in the body only and shall be of a synthetic rubber compound suitable for the service and shall be designed so that no adjustments or maintenance is required.
E. Valves shall be coated per AWWA C550 and in full compliance with NSF-61.
F. Provide gear operators furnished with AWWA 2 inch nut and sealed housing designed for buried and submerged service for depths up to 10 feet below water for valves over 6 inches. Provide buried extension shaft with AWWA nut, removable cover, and buried shaft cover and 1 inch extension shafts as necessary for the buried/submerged depth (up to 10 feet) of the valve operator. Contractor to cut shaft and provide buried shaft cover as necessary. Provide two (2) t-handle valve wrenches for the project. Refer also to valve box detail on the drawings for further requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings.
G. Install valves where they are easily accessible. Provide full port ball valves for drain and blow down on all strainers, air-handlers, air separator, chiller piping, boiler piping, etc. Drain valves shall include hose thread connector for attaching drain hose (standard garden hose). Provide a threaded cap on each connector with washer.
HYDRONIC PIPING 15510-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
H. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.
I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting.
K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
L. Use dielectric unions of flanges between ferrous and non-ferrous metals to prevent corrosion reaction. Use insulated bolts on flanges.
M. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3 feet of cover and as coordinated with all other buried services, either existing or being installed.
N. Excavate and backfill in accordance with sections on excavation and backfilling and as further described herein.
O. All welds shall be properly prepared and painted to prevent oxidation prior to applying insulation or other protective covering. All exposed uninsulated piping shall be painted completely. Refer to Section 15010.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Install flanges/unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe.
C. Install gate or ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. (Above grade)
D. Provide manual air vents at the high point of piping and where indicated on drawings.
E. Provide 3/4 inch gate or ball drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment.
F. Cleaning of piping systems.
1. Conform to applicable codes for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical systems, and for delivery to public sewage systems.
2. System Cleaner
a. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products.
HYDRONIC PIPING 15510-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
b. Algaecide; chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or microbiocides such as quarternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis, or isothiazolones.
3. Preparation
a. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning.
b. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.
4. Cleaning Sequence
a. Add cleaner to closed systems at concentration as recommended by manufacturer of water contained in the system; of one pound per 100 gallons of water for hot systems and one pound per 50 gallons of water for cold systems.
b. Hydronic Water Systems: Contractor shall rent a pump with strainer and pipe to new system. Contractor shall circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed. After cleaning and flushing, the Contractor shall connect new piping to existing system as shown on drawings.
c. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of Architect/Engineer.
d. Flush open systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and refill.
e. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.
f. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed. Include disassembly of components as required.
*** END OF SECTION ***
HYDRONIC PIPING 15510-7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HYDRONIC PIPING 15510-8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15515
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Air Vents.
B. Strainers.
C. P/T Plugs.
D. Balancing Devices.
E. Relief Valves.
F. Suction Diffusers.
G. Thermometers.
H. Pressure Gauges.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15260 ...... Piping Insulation.
C. Section 15280 ...... Equipment Insulation.
D. Section 15400 ...... Testing of Piping Systems.
E. Section 15510 ...... Hydronic Piping.
F. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—AIR VENTS
A. Amtrol.
B. Armstrong.
C. TACO.
2.02 AIR VENTS
A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber. Vertical Section of pipe shall be same diameter as pipe served up to 1-1/2", larger pipes shall have a minimum of 2" in diameter.
B. Automatic Type: Air vent shall have a pilot operated elimination mechanism, 1/4" orifice and have a self cleaning mechanism. Air vent shall be Model No. 720, as manufactured by Amtrol.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—STRAINERS
A. Spirax/Sarco.
B. Mueller.
C. Watts Regulator.
D. Titan.
2.04 STRAINERS
A. Strainers for pipe sizes 2" and smaller, shall be Sarco, Type BT, screwed and sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall be Type AF-125 flanged. Type BT strainers shall have screens having 0.033" openings, and Type AF-125 strainers shall be furnished with monel screens. Provide strainers to protect all automatic controls, valves, and pumps not equipped with integral strainers. Provide a disposable fine mesh start-up screen which shall be removed after thirty (30) days of operation.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Strainer shall be sized for a maximum of 2 psi pressure drop.
2.05 RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled.
2.06 CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVES
A. CBV-T (½” through 2” NPT threaded type):
Furnish and install, as shown on plans and with manufacturer’s recommendations, Model CBV-T threaded type circuit balancing valves.
Each valve shall have metering ports incorporating Nordel check valves on both sides of the seat.
All valves shall be “Y” pattern, equal percentage, globe style, designed either for presetting with a balance schedule or for proportional balancing. All metal parts are bronze copper alloy. Each valve shall provide four functions:
precise flow measurement;
precision flow balancing;
positive shutoff with a no-drip soft seat; and
diagnostic point for system analysis.
A ¼” NPT tapped drain port shall be provided on each side of valve seat.
Valves shall have four (4) full 360 degree adjustment turns of the handwheel (1,440 degrees) with a micrometer-type indicator and hidden memory feature to program the valve for a precise, tamper-proof, balanced setting. When installed, the handwheel and metering ports shall not be located on the bottom of the valve to prevent sediment deposits. Handwheel scale must be able to be positioned so that it may be clearly read without the use of mirrors or any special tools. Metering ports shall be interchangeable with drain ports to allow for read-out flexibility when installed in tight piping locations.
Each threaded CBV-T to be shipped with a pre-formed insulation to meet or exceed ASTM D1784/Class 14253-C, MEA #7-87, ASTM E84, and ASTM E136 with a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less.
B. CBV-G 2½” through 12” Grooved/Flanged:
Furnish and install, as shown on plans and with manufacturer’s recommendations, Circuit Balancing Valves.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
The valve body shall be ductile iron with grooved ends or with Armgrip(tm) non-rotating ductile iron flange adapters. Valves shall be suitable for the working pressures and temperatures as shown on drawings.
Each valve shall have metering ports incorporating Nordel check valves, on both sides of the seat.
All valves shall be “Y” pattern, modified equal percentage, globe style, designed either for presetting with a balance schedule or for proportional balancing. Each valve shall perform four functions:
precise flow measurement
precision flow balancing
positive shutoff with a no-drip soft seat; and
diagnostic point for system analysis.
Valves shall have five, (2½” and 3”) six, (4” through 6”) twelve, (8”) ten, (10”) or fourteen (12”) full 360 degree adjustment turns of the handwheel with a micrometer-type indicator and hidden memory feature to program the valve for a precise, tamper-proof balanced setting. When installed, the handwheel and metering ports shall not be located on the bottom of the valve to prevent sediment deposits. Handwheel scale must be able to be positioned so that it may clearly read without the use of mirrors or any special tools.
Circuit balancing valves shall be installed at least five pipe diameters downstream from any fitting and at least ten pipe diameters downstream from any pump. Two pipe diameters downstream of the CBV shall be free of any fitting.
The valve shall be furnished with pre-formed insulation to meet or exceed ASTM D1784/Class 14253-C, MEA #7-87, ASTM E84, and ASTM E136 with a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less.
C. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Armstrong, Tour & Andersson, Macon, or Mepco.
D. Provide an Armstrong, Model CBVM-135/60 or equal, meter kit. Kit shall have two (2) meter, 5 foot hose each, and shall have a range of 0'-60'.
2.07 THERMOMETERS
A. Provide thermometers where indicated, specified, and required. They shall be installed so that they can be clearly read from the floor.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Industrial stem thermometers shall have a scale not less than 9" long and shall be red-reading mercury type with white background and black etched graduations and numerals. Casing materials shall be aluminum on all products installed outdoors.
C. Thermometers shall be suitable for the service intended and the range shall be selected to span from approximately 10 degrees below through 10 degrees above the operating range of the fluid.
D. Thermometers shall have a guaranteed accuracy of within 1% of the range scale and shall be provided with 1 degree graduations. Thermometers shall be provided with brass separable socket wells.
E. Provide thermometer wells and necessary fittings where specified or indicated. Wells installed in insulated piping shall be provided with lagging extensions of appropriate length to accommodate insulation.
F. Thermometers shall be as manufactured by Marsh Instrument Co., Weksler Instrumentation, Trerice, Miljoco, or approved equal.
2.08 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure and compound pressure gauges shall be installed so that they can be clearly read from the floor and shall be Bronze Bourdon tube type with minimum 6" dials and snubbers. Dials shall be white with black numerals, graduations, and pointers, and shall be set in either iron, steel, or aluminum cases having a baked enamel finish. Cases shall have safety blowout plugs.
B. Pressure gauges shall have a range of approximately twice the operating pressure and all gauges shall have an accuracy of 1/2 of 1% of full scale reading. Gauges shall be provided with brass shutoff cocks.
C. Provide compound pressure gauges in pump suction pipe (30" Hg VAC. to 100 psi).
D. Provide gauges where indicated, specified, or required.
E. Gauges shall be manufactured by Marshalltown Instrument, Weksler Instrumentation, Trerice, Miljoco, or approved equal.
2.09 P/T PLUGS
A. Provide, in locations shown on drawings, a 1/2 inch MPT fitting for pipe line and 1/4 inch for valve body locations to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8 inch OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with two valve cores of Neoprene capable of withstanding a maximum temperature of 200 deg. F at 500 psi, fitted with a color coded and marked cap with gasket, and shall be rated at 1000 psig at 140 deg. F.
B. Provide Owner with pressure gauge adapters with 1/8" O.D. probe and 5 inch testing thermometers for chilled water with a 25 - 125 F range.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Supply and present to the Owner upon completion of testing, two (2) pressure and temperature test kits. Each shall consist of one dual scale (0-100 psi, 0-230 feet of water) pressure gauge with a No. 500 gauge adapter attached, one 25-125 F pocket testing thermometer, one 0-220 F pocket testing thermometer, one 500 gauge adapter, and one protective carrying case.
D. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Peterson, Sisco, or approved equal.
2.10 SUCTION DIFFUSER
A. Provide a suction diffuser at inlet of each base mounted pump. Unit shall consist of angle type body with inlet vanes and combination Diffuser-Strainer-Orifice cylinder with 3/16" diameter openings for pump protection. Unit shall be equipped with disposable fine mesh start-up strainer which shall be removed after thirty (30) days of operation. Strainer free area shall be no less than five (5) times the section area of the pump connection. Unit shall be provided with adjustable support foot to carry weight of suction piping.
B. Suction diffusers shall be as manufactured by Bell and Gossett, TACO, Armstrong, Titan FCI, or Mueller.
2.11 EXPANSION TANK
A. Tank shall be pressurized diaphragm type. (Refer to drawings for model number.)
B. Tank shall be constructed of welded steel, furnished with automatic fill valve, and ASME rated for 175 psig.
C. Tank shall be as manufactured by Armstrong, TACO, Amtrol, Inc., or Bell & Gossett.
2.12 AIR PURGER
A. Units shall be in-line type constructed of cast iron or steel and shall contain a low velocity chamber for air elimination. Unit shall be suitable for 125 psi working pressure and shall contain air vent connection and drain connection.
B. Air purger shall be manufactured by Armstrong, Amtrol, or Bell & Gossett.
2.13 AIR SEPARATOR
A. Units shall be flanged inlet and outlet type constructed of cast iron and shall contain a low velocity chamber for air elimination. Unit shall be suitable for 125 psi working pressure at 350°F and shall contain air vent connection and drain connection.
B. Air separator shall be manufactured by Armstrong, Amtrol, Taco, or Bell & Gossett.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance.
B. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.
C. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.
D. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.
E. Flow switches, temperature sensors, sensor sockets, wells gage taps, etc. shall be furnished under controls section of these specifications and installed under this Section. Locations of all sensor sockets, flow switches, and taps shall be coordinated with and supervised by the Controls Contractor.
F. Motorized control valves shall be furnished by the Controls Contractor, installed by the Mechanical Contractor.
*** END OF SECTION ***
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515-7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515-8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15540
HVAC PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Base Mounted Pumps.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15170 ...... Motors.
C. Section 15242 ...... Vibration Isolation.
D. Section 15260 ...... Piping Insulation.
E. Section 15280 ...... Equipment Insulation.
F. Section 15510 ...... Hydronic Piping.
G. Section 15515 ...... Hydronic Specialties.
H. Section 16480 ...... Motor Control.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 778—Motor Operated Water Pumps.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of pumps with minimum three years experience.
B. Alignment: Base mounted pumps shall be aligned and first time energized by the pump manufacturer's trained representative at the job site. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a statement from the Manufacturer's Representative certifying that such services were completed and the installation is per the Manufacturer's requirements.
C. Qualifications: The Manufacturer shall have a local, trained representative with a full field service support office within 50 miles of the job site. The service support office shall have stock inventory items and service personnel specifically trained to install, check- out, align, and service pumps produced by the manufacturer.
HVAC PUMPS 15540-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Submit certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions.
1.08 EXTRA PARTS
A. Provide one extra set of mechanical seals and a complete set of gaskets for each pump installed on this project.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide one (1) year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Division 1.
B. In addition to the manufacturer's basic one year warranty, provide all parts , next day parts shipping costs, additional alignment services, motor replacement and labor, as necessary for repairs of a failed pump during the warranty period, at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. BASIS OF DESIGN—Weinman.
HVAC PUMPS 15540-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. PRE-APPROVED SUBSTITUTES (Approved to Bid)
1. TACO.
2. ITT-Bell & Gossett.
3. Proposed Substitutes.
4. All pre-approved substitutes and proposed substitutes shall submit, at a minimum, the following information prior to bid, to the Architect/Engineer in addition to the requirements as required by the Specification Section 15010. Accepted substitutes other than the Basis of Design and the Pre-Approved Substitutes will be notified via written addendum.
a. All pump curves, specifically identifying all proposed options.
b. Each selected motor horsepower and its’ duty rating and efficiency rating.
c. Pump dimensions and weights.
d. ¼ scale floor plan layout sketch of pump/mechanical room with actual substitute pump sizes and the manufacturers recommended clearances.
e. Give a written list of significant distinguishable differences between the Basis of Design pump and the substitute pump.
f. Describe how the substitute pump will be provided with factory certified start-up and warranty service. Specify all 1st, 2nd and 3rd parties (company names and personnel) which will be involved in the delivery of said service. Specify location, distance from jobsite, anticipated response times, etc., for delivery of said service.
g. Describe the details of all spare parts for the substitute pump which will be housed locally (within 50 miles) or describe the method of next day parts delivery for replacement parts. State the party responsible for the complete coverage of shipping costs, parts costs, and labor costs during the warranty period (required for corrective action for a failed pump), if it is a party other than this pump manufacturer’s representative.
2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Balance: Rotating parts, statically and dynamically.
B. Construction: To permit servicing without breaking piping or motor connections.
C. Pump Motors: Operate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise on drawings.
D. Pump Connections: Flanged-Provide flat faced matching flanges as required.
HVAC PUMPS 15540-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
E. All pump motors shall be totally-enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).
F. All HVAC pump motors shall be IEEE rated energy efficient, high efficiency motors and shall comply with Specification Section 15170.
G. All HVAC pump motors designated for variable frequency drive (VFD) duty shall be VFD compatible motors and be inverter duty rated.
H. Provide a pump selection (i.e. model #) which will allow for the installation of a larger impeller than that required to meet the GPM and static head characteristics listed on the pump schedule. Pump selection shall allow for an increased size impeller (minimum ¼" larger diameter) to be installed within the same pump casing.
2.03 BASE MOUNTED END SUCTION PUMPS
A. Type: Horizontal, flexible coupled, front pull out, centrifugal pump of cast iron or steel, for 125 psig maximum working pressure.
B. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.
C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to motor shaft, dynamically balanced.
D. Bearings: Permanently lubricated roller or ball bearings.
E. Shaft: Carbon steel shaft, bronze key locked shaft sleeve, 'O' ring sealed from pumped liquid. Wetted shaft pumps are not accepted unless otherwise noted on the Pump Schedule.
F. Seal: Stainless steel mechanical seal with Buna-N elastomers, Ni - Resist seat and Carbon Washers.
G. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard. Flexible couplings shall be oversized for variable speed pumps. Refer to the schedule of coupling sizes to be used, shown later in this section.
H. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim.
I. Motor Requirements
1. Motors in NEMA frames 143T through 445T shall be 3 phase, 60 hertz, 230/460 volts.
2. Motors shall be suitable for continuous duty in ambient temperatures from - 30°C to 40°C at rated service factor. Altitude shall be less than 3,300'.
3. All motors shall have a service factor of 1.15.
4. All motors shall be capable of developing NEMA Design B locked rotor and pull up torque with 90% of rated voltage applied.
HVAC PUMPS 15540-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
5. The insulation system must be Class "F" or better with Class "B" rise at service factor 1.15 (90°C).
6. Dual voltage motors 7.5 HP and larger must be capable of ATL and WYE- Delta starting on both voltages and part winding starting on the lower voltage.
7. Stator frame and end brackets shall be cast iron construction.
8. Bearings shall be either ball or cylindrical roller bearings.
9. Bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 rated life of 30,000 hours with external load factors per NEMA MG1-14.42.
10. Frames 256T and smaller shall use sealed bearings. Frames 284T and larger shall be regreasable while motor is operating.
11. All hardware shall be zinc-dichromate plated.
12. Nameplates shall be 304 stainless steel.
13. All motors shall have a neoprene gasket between the conduit box and the motor frame.
14. All motors to be dynamically balanced to 0.6 mils peak to peak or better.
15. Motors called out on the pump schedules to be multi-speed shall be 1800/900 RPM, 4 pole/8 pole, variable torque type with two (2) windings (single winding motors not acceptable).
16. Applicable Standards and Test:
a. NEMA Publication MG-1.
b. Testing per NEMA MG-1-12.53a (IEEE Test Standard, Method B with segregated loss analysis).
c. All motors shall be given a routine test per NEMA MG-1, Section 12.51.
d. UL Recognition and CSA listings are required. The nameplate shall be stamped accordingly.
e. Frame assignments shall be per NEMA MG-13.
2.04 SPLIT CASE PUMPS
A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, horizontal split casing, for 125 psig maximum working pressure.
B. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.
HVAC PUMPS 15540-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to motor shaft.
D. Bearings: Permanently lubricated roller or ball bearings.
E. Shaft: 316 stainless steel with bronze shaft sleeve.
F. Seal: Stainless steel mechanical seal with Buna-N elastomers, Ni - Resist seat and Carbon Washers.
G. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard. Flexible couplings shall be oversized for variable speed pumps. Refer to the schedule of coupling sizes to be used, shown later in this section.
H. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim.
2.05 PUMP COUPLING SCHEDULE
A. Pump Coupling Sizes for 1750 RPM Motors.
MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR STANDARD VFD HP FRAME RPM COUPLING SIZE COUPLING SIZE
1 143T 1750 3 4 1.5 145T 1750 3 4 2 145T 1750 4 5 3 182T 1750 4 5 5 184T 1750 5 6 7.5 213 1750 6 7 10 215T 1750 6 7 15 254T 1750 7 8 20 256T 1750 7 8 25 284T 1750 8 9 30 286T 1750 8 9 40 324T 1750 9 10 50 326T 1750 9 10 60 364T 1750 10 10
HVAC PUMPS 15540-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Pump Coupling Sizes for 1150 RPM Motors.
MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR STANDARD VFD HP FRAME RPM COUPLING SIZE COUPLING SIZE
5 215T 1150 6 7 7.5 254T 1150 7 8 10 256T 1150 7 8 15 284T 1150 8 9 20 286T 1150 8 9
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
D. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or eccentric reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Refer to Section 15140.
E. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
F. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains.
G. Lubricate pumps before start-up.
H. This Contractor shall provide, as a part of the Base Bid, impeller shaving on all pumps 7½ HP and larger (all other pumps shall be installed with impellers sized per the pump schedule). Impeller shaving shall occur upon approval of the T&B agents recommendations. This Contractor shall coordinate this effort with the Owner/Engineer and the machine shop so as to minimize the downtime of the pump(s) and disruption to the building occupants.
I. Contractor shall provide and grout the base of all pumps as recommended by the pump manufacturer.
J. Contractor shall provide start-up service from the Manufacturer's Representative, which shall include the alignment of the pump coupling for all pumps. Laser alignment shall be completed for pumps 20 HP and larger.
HVAC PUMPS 15540-7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
K. Contractor shall provide a 3-plane vibration test for all pumps 20 HP and larger. Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of test results to the Engineer for review. All vibration testing shall be provided by a third party, Certified in 3-plane vibration testing.
L. Start-up Certificate: Submit the start-up certificate to the Architect/Engineer within seven (7) days from the day of start-up. A copy of the start-up certificate shall be available on-site, the day the start-up is complete, and remain available at the site for the duration of the project.
*** END OF SECTION ***
HVAC PUMPS 15540-8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15545
CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cleaning of Piping Systems.
B. Chemical Feeder Equipment.
C. Treatment for Closed Systems.
D. Treatment for Open Systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15010 ...... Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15510 ...... Hydronic Piping.
C. Section 15975 ...... Building Management and Automatic Temperature Control System.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 15010 and Division 1.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating system schematics, equipment locations, and controls schematics.
C. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.
D. Submit product data indicating chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1.
F. Submit manufacturer's field reports under provisions of Division 1.
G. Submit reports indicating start-up of treatment systems is completed and operating properly.
H. Submit reports indicating analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment.
CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT 15545-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15010.
B. Include data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and other equipment including spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs.
C. Include step by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. Company shall have local representatives with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical systems, and for delivery to public sewage systems.
1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of treatment systems for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Provide monthly technical service visits to perform field inspections and make water analysis on site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating requirements, and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report after each visit.
C. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services for warranty period.
D. Include training course at startup of systems for operating personnel, instructing them on installation, care, maintenance, testing, and operation of water treatment systems.
E. Provide on site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown to properly evaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in writing based upon these inspections.
F. Provide separate quote for providing equipment and chemicals to treat recycled water system.
1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Submit maintenance materials under provisions of Division 1.
B. Provide sufficient chemicals for treatment and testing during warranty period.
CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT 15545-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. BASIS OF DESIGN—Garratt Callahan Company: Contractor shall confirm name of water treatment contractor with Owner prior to bid since the Owner is in the process of selecting water treatment providers for its Bradenton Campus for the 2015-2016 period.
B. OTHER SUBSTITUTES—Submit a written substitution request, prior to bid, to the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 15010. Accepted substitutes will be notified via Addendum.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. System Cleaner
1. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products.
2. Algaecide.
B. Closed System Treatment (Water)
1. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH.
2. Corrosion inhibitors.
3. Conductivity enhancers.
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Closed System
1. Refer to floor plans for injection equipment requirements.
2. A valved sample point with tap or faucet device shall be provided and installed remote from the pot feeder, in each closed system.
3. Provide corrosion coupon rack, in each closed system, complete with isolation valves.
4. Provide side stream bag or cartridge filter sized to handle two percent (2%) of system flow for each closed system.
CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT 15545-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Open System
1. The Contractor is to provide all equipment, piping, wiring, etc., and installation required for condenser water make-up. This package is to include all water treatment requirements, including all required chemicals for one (1) year from completion date, for open condenser water loops. (Refer to drawings for piping and water treatment schematic diagram.)
2. Water treatment hardware, for each cooling tower loop, shall include, but not be limited to:
a. One (1) Lakewood Model 412 Conductivity/pH Controller.
b. One (1) LMI Model A751-925 Flowmeter/Pulser Operated Chemical Feed Pump.
c. One (1) LMI Model A151-955 Chemical Feed Pump (Acid Feed).
d. Two (2) LMI Model A181-955 Chemical Feed Pumps (Biocide Feed).
e. One (1) Grasslin Two (2) Circuit Electronic Time Switches, Model 32- 72-2 (Biocide Control).
f. LMI Flowmeter-Pulser 2" Model FP-20 (Effluent Metering).
g. Corrosion Coupon Rack for Closed System.
3. Water Treatment Chemicals are to be Administered as Follows:
a. For operation of the water treatment while city water is being used for make-up (determined by water meter), the existing system shall remain in operation. This system is to administer corrosion inhibitor based on metered make-up (from city water) and blow-off is to be based on time.
b. While the cooling towers are utilizing effluent water (as described by the water meter), water treatment is to be administered as follows:
(1) pH is to be measured and controlled automatically by adding acid.
(2) Blow-off is to be controlled based on conductivity.
(3) Corrosion inhibitor is to be fed based on metered make-up.
(4) Biocides to be fed alternately based on time.
CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT 15545-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
4. Regular Water Treatment Services are to be Provided for One (1) year as follows:
a. Corrosion Inhibitor for Effluent Water.
b. Primary Oxidizing Biocide (BIO-1).
c. Primary Non-Oxidizing Biocide (BIO-2).
d. Sodium Nitrite, Hot and Chilled Water Closed System Treatment.
e. Antifoam Agent.
f. Corrosion Coupons.
g. Corrosion Coupon Analysis Every Sixty (60) Days, All Systems.
h. Monthly Service, Including Written Report (3 copies).
i. Training of Plant Personnel.
j. Log Sheets and Water Control Manuals for Plant Personnel Use.
k. Test Kits and Reagents.
l. Product Fact Sheets and Material Safety Data Sheets.
m. Acid to be Supplied by this Contractor.
5. Valve Requirements
a. Acceptable Manufacturers—Valves
(1) Stockham, Crane, Jenkins, Nibco (unless noted otherwise).
b. Gate Valves
(1) Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, solder ends.
c. Globe Valves
(1) Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder ends, with backseating capacity.
CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT 15545-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
d. Ball Valves
(1) Up to 2 Inches: Bronze two piece body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, and balancing stops, solder ends.
e. Check Valves
(1) Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, solder ends.
(2) 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged ends (horizontal piping).
6. Piping Requirements (except water treatment):
a. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Carbon steel, buttweld, Schedule 40.
b. 2 Inches and Smaller: Type L, hand temper copper tubing.
c. Fittings
(1) 2-1/2" and Larger: Carbon steel, buttweld, Schedule 40.
(2) 2" and Smaller: Wrought copper sweat.
d. Flanges (2-1/2" and larger): Carbon steel, slip-on, raised face, 150 lbs. and 250 lbs.
e. Unions (2" and Smaller): Brass.
7. Shop Drawings Shall be Submitted for Review by the Engineer after Review of Field Conditions for the Following Items:
a. All Water Treatment Products and Installation.
b. Effluent Pipe Routing and Materials.
c. Project Schedule.
d. Float Valve Materials and Installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. System shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system.
B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.
CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT 15545-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3.02 CLEANING SEQUENCE
A. Remove strainers, automatic air vents, and flow regulators from all HVAC piping systems and ensure all control and shut-off valves are fully open. Flush each HVAC system for two hours.
B. Each HVAC piping system shall be thoroughly cleaned by filling with a solution of commercial cleaning chemicals designed to remove deposits such as pipe dope, oils, loose mill scale, rust and other extraneous materials. The recommended dosages and characteristics of the cleaner shall be such that the water need only be at ambient temperature. After the recommended dosages are added the water shall be circulated for 36-72 hours. Systems shall then be drained, filled and flushed with clean water until no foreign matter is observed and total alkalinity of rinse water is equal to that of the make up water.
C. Replace strainers, air vents, and flow regulators and fill system with clean water. In closed systems ensure expansion tank (if supplies) is approximately 2/3 water at system working pressure.
D. Each system shall be properly treated to prevent scaling and corrosion.
E. The water treatment service company currently under contract to the School Board to supply water treatment services for HVAC systems shall supervise the flushing and cleaning. That company shall certify in writing that the flushing and cleaning has been properly done.
F. All cost associated with this service and certification shall be paid by the Contractor.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install closed and open systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT
A. Provide one bypass feeder. Install isolating and drain valves and necessary piping. Install around globe valve downstream of circulating pumps unless indicated otherwise.
B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test.
C. Provide 3/4 inch water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test specimens.
D. Chemical for changing and maintaining the water treatment shall be supplied by the water treatment service company.
*** END OF SECTION ***
CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT 15545-7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT 15545-8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15684
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Packaged Water Cooled Liquid Chiller.
B. Charge of Refrigerant and Oil.
C. Controls and Control Connections.
D. Chilled Water Connections.
E. Starters.
F. Electrical Power Connections.
G. Ancillary Chiller Support Equipment.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15170 ...... Motors.
B. Section 15242 ...... Vibration Isolation.
C. Section 15510 ...... Hydronic Piping.
D. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ARI 550/590-2003—Standard for Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle.
B. ANSI/ASHRAE 15—Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
C. ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2004—Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Buildings.
D. ANSI/ASME SEC 8—Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.04 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS (PRIOR TO FINAL FACTORY ORDERING)—SELECTED OFFERING
A. Submit three (3) sets of shop drawings to Engineer.
B. Submit mechanical shop drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and floor loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate valves, strainers, refrigerant relief connections, and thermostatic valves required for complete system.
C. Submit electrical shop drawings indicating all external field connections, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements, and wiring diagrams. Clearly indicate amperage in-rush currents, feeder sizes and connections. Identify circuit breaker feeder sizes needed to meet chiller requirements.
D. Clearly identify any items to be installed by others in a separate letter along with the submittal.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
F. After the Installing Contractor has been selected, provide an additional three (3) sets of the Approved Shop Drawings to the Installing Contractor.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA (WITHIN 4 WEEKS AFTER SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL APPROVAL)
A. Submit operations data.
B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories. Include troubleshooting guide.
C. Submit maintenance data.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ARI 550/590-2003 codes for construction, testing, and rating of centrifugal water chillers, unless otherwise stated herein.
B. Provide UL label for electrical components.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site (FOB to the jobsite). The Manufacturer's Technicians are to assemble the components that are shipped loose except those listed on the submittal to be installed by others.
B. Manufacturer shall provide weather protection for the delivered equipment suitable for transportation and outside storage in a tropical environment.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. The Manufacturer shall be responsible to be on-site during off-loading and supervise the process. Provide the Installing Contractor with 72 hours notice of equipment arrival at the job site. Coordinate rigging and scheduling requirements with the Contractor prior to delivery. The Installing Contractor shall provide rigging and unloading of the chiller(s) under the supervision of the Manufacturer.
D. The Installing Contractor shall protect units on site from physical damage after the equipment is unloaded. The equipment manufacturer shall immediately notify the Owner/Engineer of any apparent construction damage to the equipment identified during start-up process.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer shall meet with the Installing Contractor to coordinate specific installation requirements. Also, the Manufacturer shall visit the site no less than two (2) times during installation to identify any issues of the Manufacturer. A copy of each site visit report shall be sent to the Project Engineer and Owner’s Representative.
B. The Manufacturer shall provide a complete checkout of the finished installation and all required pre-startup inspections and service. The initial startup of equipment shall be done under supervision of the Manufacturer. The Manufacturer shall issue a statement to the Project Engineer certifying the pre-startup inspections were completed and the equipment was installed properly per Manufacturer’s instructions or identify any observed deficiencies (“statement of pre-startup inspections”).
C. Manufacturer shall provide complete 10 year, Full Machine Parts and Labor Warranty; to include: Maintenance and Service Agreements, Supplies and Replacement Fluids.
D. START OF WARRANTY PERIOD: The Manufacturer shall submit a complete package copy of the record documents related to the chiller up to the day the Manufacturer submits the pre-startup inspection report; to include, but not limited to: factory test data; unloading supervision report; site visit reports during the installation; and the pre-startup inspection report. The one (1) year warranty shall begin on the day the Engineer of Record receives and approves, by dated signature, the record document package. Should the Manufacturer fail to submit the record document package, the one (1) year unconditional warranty shall begin on the same date the Installing Contractor Substantial Completion for the installation portion of the project occurs.
1.09 CERTIFIED PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Provide factory certified ARI testing. The factory certified test shall be part of the base bid. Provide five (5) original copies of final test results to Engineer.
B. Part load testing shall be performed in accordance to procedures as specified in ARI- 550/590-2003.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. APPROVED TO BID:
1. Trane.
2. OTHER SUBSTITUTES—Submit a written substitution request, prior to bid, to the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 15010. Accepted substitutes will be notified via Addendum.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNIT
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested water cooled liquid chillers consisting of centrifugal compressor, starter condenser, evaporator, thermal expansion valve or orifice, refrigeration accessories, control panel, condenser barrel and evaporator barrel, marine water box, and vibration isolators. Vibration isolators shall be neoprene pads if chiller is located on ground level slab or manufacturer approved spring isolators if not.
1. For chillers with dual compressors, provide each compressor with a dedicated motor and motor controller, and provide for continued operation when either compressor-drive assembly fails or is being serviced.
B. The chillers design shall be capable of operating at 25% full load with 85 F entering condenser water temperature without surge or other harmful effects or erratic operation. The chiller manufacturer shall include this test point in the factory performance test. If a variable speed drive is required to accomplish this requirement it must be provided. Hot gas bypass is NOT acceptable.
2.03 COMPRESSOR-DRIVE ASSEMBLY
A. Description: Single-stage or multistage, variable-displacement, centrifugal-type compressor driven by an electric motor.
B. Compressor:
1. Casing: Cast iron, precision ground.
2. Impeller: High-strength cast aluminum or cast-aluminum alloy on carbon- or alloy-steel shaft.
C. Drive: Provide hermetic drive design using an electric motor as the driver.
1. Gear Drives: For chillers with gear drives, provide single- or double-helical gear design continuously coated with oil while chiller is operating. Gears shall comply with American Gear Manufacturer Association standards. Gear driven machines shall be integrally assembled in the compressor rotor support
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
and individually mounted in its own journal and thrust bearings. Non-rotor supported gears are acceptable but must be visible via inspection plate. Manufacturers with speed increasing transmissions (gear drives) shall provide an annual inspection of the gears and all bearings. A written report shall be forwarded to the owner each year over the first ten (10) years to confirm completion of inspection. The manufacturer must also include a (10) year parts and labor warranty for shaft seal replacements.
2. Drive Coupling: For chillers with open drives, provide flexible disc with all- metal construction and no wearing parts to ensure long life without the need for lubrication.
3. Seals: Seal drive assembly to prevent refrigerant leakage.
D. Compressor Motor:
1. Continuous-duty, squirrel-cage, induction-type, two-pole motor with energy efficiency required to suit chiller energy efficiency indicated.
2. Factory mounted, aligned, and balanced as part of compressor assembly before shipping.
3. Motor shall be of sufficient capacity to drive compressor throughout entire operating range without overload and with sufficient capacity to start and accelerate compressor without damage.
4. For chillers with open drives, provide motor with open-dripproof enclosure.
5. Provide motor with thermistor or RTD to monitor bearing temperature and report information to chiller control panel.
6. Motor transmission and compressor will be hermetically sealed into a common assembly and arranged for easy servicing. Compressor motor shall be equipped with over temperature sensors/safeties.
7. The motor shall be hermetic and either suction or liquid refrigerant cooled. Hot gas motor cooling is not acceptable. If an open motor design is used, then the manufacturer shall pay to provide and install a chilled water AHU in the chiller plant to offset the motor heat introduced into the space (AHU capacity is approximately 0.018 tons per chiller tons). This unit must be completely operational and include all wiring and controls. The manufacturer would also be responsible for covering any and all engineering costs (mechanical and electrical) associated with the redesign of the chiller plant to accommodate the additional AHU, chiller capacity and controls. In addition, the scheduled chiller tonnage shall be increased by the capacity of the additional AHU. The combined kW of the additional AHU and chiller provided shall not exceed the scheduled kW or be subject to both demand and use penalties. Open drive chiller manufacturers shall list, on the submittal, additional maintenance requirements due to coupling alignment, refrigerant seal, coupling and bearings.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
E. Vibration Balance: Balance chiller compressor and drive assembly to provide a precision balance that is free of noticeable vibration over the entire operating range.
1. Overspeed Test: 25 percent above design operating speed.
F. Service: Easily accessible for inspection and service.
1. Compressor's internal components shall be accessible without having to remove compressor-drive assembly from chiller.
2. Transmission gears will be of double helical type and be arranged for visual inspection without disassembly or removal of compressor casing or impeller.
3. Provide lifting lugs or eyebolts attached to casing.
G. Capacity Control: Maintain stable operation that is free of surge, cavitation, and vibration throughout range of operation. Configure to achieve most energy-efficient operation possible.
H. Oil Lubrication System: Consisting of pump, filtration, cooler, factory-wired power connection, and controls.
1. Provide lubrication to bearings, gears, and other rotating surfaces at all operating, startup, coastdown, and standby conditions including power failure.
2. Thermostatically controlled oil heater properly sized to remove refrigerant from oil.
3. Oil filter shall be the easily replaceable cartridge type with means of positive isolation while servicing.
4. Oil pump starter will be factory supplied and mounted on the chiller and factory wired with only field power leads required.
5. Hermetic motor driven oil pump
6. Factory-installed and pressure-tested piping with isolation valves and accessories.
7. Oil compatible with refrigerant and chiller components.
8. Positive visual indication of oil level.
9. Reservoir oil temperature gage.
2.04 REFRIGERATION
A. Refrigerant:
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1. Compatibility: Chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.
2. Chiller shall only utilize refrigerants as outlined in ASHRAE Standard 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems.
B. Refrigerant Flow Control: Manufacturer's standard refrigerant flow-control device satisfying performance requirements indicated.
C. Pressure Relief Device:
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and in applicable portions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
D. Refrigeration Transfer: Provide service valves and other factory-installed accessories required to facilitate transfer of refrigerant from chiller to a remote refrigerant storage and recycling system. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 147.
E. Purge System:
1. For chillers operating at subatmospheric pressures (using R-123 refrigerant), factory install an automatic purge system for collection and return of refrigerant and lubricating oil and for removal of noncondensables including, but not limited to, water, water vapor, and noncondensable gases.
2. System shall be a thermal purge design, refrigerant or air cooled, equipped with a carbon filter that includes an automatic regeneration cycle.
3. Factory wire to chiller's main power supply and system complete with controls, piping, and refrigerant valves to isolate the purge system from the chiller.
4. Construct components of noncorrodible materials.
5. Controls shall interface with chiller control panel to indicate modes of operation, set points, data reports, diagnostics, and alarms.
6. Efficiency of not more than 0.02 lb of refrigerant per pound of air when rated according to ARI 580.
7. Operation independent of chiller per ASHRAE 147.
F. Positive-Pressure System:
1. For chillers operating at subatmospheric pressures (using R-123 refrigerant), factory install an automatic positive-pressure system.
2. During nonoperational periods, positive-pressure system shall automatically maintain a positive pressure for atmosphere in the refrigerant pressure vessel
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
of not less than 0.5 psig (adjustable) up to a pressure that remains within the vessel design pressure limits.
3. System shall be factory wired and include controller, electric heat, pressure transmitter, or switch.
2.05 EVAPORATOR
A. Description: Shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within shell with a distributor trough and a perforated distributor plate, located under the entire tube bundle. Shell is separate from condenser.
B. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with fusion welded seams.
C. Designed to prevent liquid refrigerant carryover from entering compressor.
D. Provide evaporator with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of liquid-refrigerant level.
E. Tubes:
1. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets and other tubes.
2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube sheets.
3. Material: Copper.
4. Minimum Wall Thickness: 0.028 inch.
5. External Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Internal Finish: Enhanced.
F. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to accommodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in shell. End tube sheets shall be epoxy coated.
G. Water Box:
1. Carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and cleaning of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell.
2. Standard type for water box.
3. Provide water boxes with lifting lugs or eyebolts.
4. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Flanged.
5. Water box shall be epoxy coated.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.06 CONDENSER
A. Description: Horizontal shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within shell and gas baffle. Shell is separate from evaporator.
B. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with fusion welded seams.
C. Designed to prevent direct impingement of high-velocity hot gas from compressor discharge on tubes.
D. Provide condenser with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of refrigerant charge and condition.
E. Tubes:
1. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets and other tubes.
2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube sheets.
3. Material: Copper
4. Minimum Wall Thickness: 0.028 inch.
5. External Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Internal Finish: Enhanced.
F. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to accommodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in shell. End tube sheets shall be epoxy coated.
G. Water Box:
1. Carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and cleaning of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell.
2. Marine type for water box with piping connections.
3. Provide water boxes and marine water-box covers with lifting lugs or eyebolts.
4. Davited marine water-box covers.
5. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Flanged.
6. Fit each water box with 3/4-inch drain connection at low point and vent connection at high point, each with valve and threaded plug.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -9 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
7. Integral steel water baffles shall be located and welded within the water box to provide required pass arrangements.
8. Design working pressure shall be 150 psig and the boxes tested at 225 psig.
9. Water box shall be epoxy coated.
2.07 INSULATION
A. Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Manufacturer: Armaflex or equivalent (25/50) foam insulation
B. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Factory-applied insulation over all cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming condensation. Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator shell and end tube sheets, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping. Insulation of the evaporator water boxes including nozzles shall be field applied by the Contractor and shall be removable.
1. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface.
2. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and paint as indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel surfaces.
3. Seal seams and joints to provide a vapor barrier.
4. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match other painted parts.
2.08 ELECTRICAL
A. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.
B. Motor Starter:
1. Provide a NEMA-1 enclosed Wye-Delta closed transition starter conforming to NEMA motor standards. The starter shall be suitable for control and running over current protection of chiller motor. The starter shall be for a soft start with air break contactors capable of carrying the specified current on a continuous and locked rotor basis without damage. Starter shall contain overload protection on each leg of the three phase voltage.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -10 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2. The starter shall be mounted on the chiller, complete wiring between the chiller and the starter shall be the responsibility and expense of the Manufacturer. Provide enclosure with a door lock and keys. A 3-phase analog ammeter with position switch, 3-phase analog voltmeter with position switch, and control transformer shall be factory mounted, wired, and tested.
3. Provide two (2) sets of auxiliary contacts either in the starter or in the electric control panel for feedback of starter being engaged. Overload relays shall be inverse time - magnetic type or solid state on each phase and to be manually reset. Control transformer and circuit shall be 120 volts with fused primary and secondary and disconnected with the main disconnect switch.
4. The Manufacturers shall provide a lockable service disconnect.
5. The chiller motor starter shall have a short circuit withstand rating (SCWR) of greater than or equal of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes. This rating shall be marked on the motor starter enclosure in accordance with UL 508 or some accredited third party agency. If the starter does not meet this SCWR, the chiller manufacturer shall be responsible for all costs to coordinate and install the integration of an upstream device to limit the available fault current to less than the manufacturer's starter's SCWR as certified by UL 508.
6. The manufacturer shall provide a hi-interrupting circuit breaker with 65,000 amperes or greater interrupt (AIC) rating.
7. No aluminum wiring accepted.
8. Submittals shall clearly show the starting load amps and the duration of such amp draw. Provide all data necessary for the Engineer to mate the chiller with an emergency generator in the event the chiller is put on an emergency generator in the future
C. Single-point, field-power connection to circuit breaker. Minimum withstand rating shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 65,000 A.
1. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.
D. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram. Spare wiring terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment.
E. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with adjustable undervoltage setting and isolated output contacts for hardwired connection.
F. Power Protection: Chiller shall shut down within six cycles of power interruption.
2.09 CONTROLS
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -11 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
A. Control: Standalone and microprocessor based, with all memory stored in nonvolatile memory so that reprogramming is not required on loss of electrical power.
B. Controls shall be electronic microprocessor and fully automatic.
C. Control system will provide shut-down for the following:
1. Motor overcurrent.
2. Over/Under voltage.
3. Bearing high temperature.
4. Low refrigerant temperature.
5. High condenser pressure.
6. High motor temperature.
7. High compressor discharge pressure.
8. Low oil pressure.
D. Controls will provide an override condition that automatically reduces the load on the chiller in the event of high motor temperature and low refrigerant temperature which causes a pre-alarm condition. If condition persists, controls will shut-down machine.
E. Controls will provide freeze protection when machine experiences low load.
F. Control of machine capacity will be by means of variable inlet guide vanes located in compressor section.
G. General: The control center shall be factory mounted, wired, and tested. The control center shall automatically control the operation of the unit. The control center shall be fused through an adequately sized transformer and shall include a duplex receptacle for service.
It is the intent of this specification that the control center be unit mounted. If the control center is to be mounted otherwise, all associated wiring and installation costs shall be the responsibility of the Manufacturer.
H. Display Panel: The control center shall include a multiple character alphanumeric display, individual light indicators and dial type gauges as required in this specification.
Dial type gauges shall include: evaporator refrigerant pressure, condenser refrigerant pressure, low oil pressure (sump side of oil pump), and high oil pressure (supply side of oil pump). All gauges shall be a minimum of three inches (3") in
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -12 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
diameter and scaled in engineering units. Gauges may be provided in lieu of analog sensed alphanumeric display data required.
Alphanumeric display data shall include: entering evaporator water temperature, leaving evaporator water temperature, entering condenser water temperature, leaving condenser water temperature, chiller or compressor motor amps, number of compressor starts counter, run time counter (hours of operation), date, and time of day. "Code" type alphanumeric display indexing is acceptable provided there is a permanently mounted index table to and readily accessible to the display panel.
Setpoint adjustments must be provided for: leaving chilled water temperature, operating demand limit, and pulldown demand limit.
Safety logic and fault messages shall be displayed in order to provide a means for troubleshooting problems. The control center shall display information for reason of shutdown complete with time and date of occurrence.
Mode of operation (local/remote), current operating status (loading/unloading) and operating mode (manual/auto) shall be displayable and alterable from the control center.
I. Sensors: Temperature sensors shall be 100 OHM Platinum, RTD types (except motor winding sensors which shall be RTD or thermistor type). All sensors shall be factory calibrated, tested, and operational at the time of factory testing. All sensor operation shall be field verified during the field start-up.
The Manufacturer shall provide a water flow switch (differential pressure type) for mounting by others if not installed on the unit.
J. Safety Logic and Controls: The control center shall contain proper safety and logic controls as per the manufacturers recommendations. Minimum logic shutdown conditions shall include: high condenser temperature, low oil pressure, high oil pressure, high compressor discharge temperature, low evaporator pressure and motor fault.
K. Chilled Water Reset: The control center shall be capable of operating via a remote chilled water supply temperature setpoint. Operating mode (remote/local) shall be operator selectable and current setpoint, either locally or remotely set, shall be displayable. The control center shall be capable of accepting a remote 4-20 mA remote setpoint signal when in remote mode.
The Manufacturer shall provide a means for remote start/stop operation via contact closure from a remote source.
A set of normally open dry contacts shall be provided as feedback verification from the control center of chiller in running mode.
L. Loss of Program Protection: The control center program and operator entered parameters shall be backed up by battery in case of power loss. EEPROM storage or other pre-approved means of insuring program integrity is acceptable.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -13 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
M. Flow switches shall be vapor-proof, suitable for 150 psig DWP cooler and condenser water circuits. The switch shall be rated for 115V-1 PH-60/50 Hz service provided by chiller manufacturer and on both circuits. Flow switches shall be differential pressure type, no paddle types will be accepted.
N. Operator Interface: Multiple-character digital or graphic display with dynamic update of information and with keypad or touch-sensitive display located on front of control enclosure. In either imperial or metric units selectable through the interface, display the following information:
O. Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to five parameters simultaneously over an adjustable period and frequency of polling.
P. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.
Q. Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local automatic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source.
R. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of connecting a printer and a notebook computer.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -14 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
S. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, and display chiller status and alarms.
1. ASHRAE 135, BACnet communication interface with the BAS shall enable the BAS operator to remotely control and monitor the chiller from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at chiller control panel shall be available through the BAS.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Flow Switches:
1. Chiller manufacturer shall furnish a switch for each evaporator and verify field-mounting location before installation.
2. Pressure Differential Switches:
a. Construction: Wetted parts of body and trim constructed of Type 316 stainless steel.
b. Performance: Switch shall withstand, without damage, the full- pressure rating of the heat exchanger applied to either port and exhibit zero set-point shift due to variation in working pressure.
c. Set Point: Screw type, field adjustable.
d. Electrical Connections: Internally mounted screw-type terminal blocks.
e. Switch Action: Double-pole, double-throw switch with one pole field wired to the chiller control panel and the other pole field wired to the BAS.
B. Vibration Isolation:
1. Chiller manufacturer shall furnish vibration isolation for each chiller.
2. Neoprene Pad (Hermetic Chillers):
a. Two layers of 0.375-inch thick, ribbed- or waffle-pattern neoprene pads separated by a 16-gage, stainless-steel plate.
b. Fabricate pads from 40- to 50-durometer neoprene.
c. Provide stainless-steel square bearing plate to load the pad uniformly between 20 and 40 psig with a 0.12- to 0.16-inch deflection.
3. Inertia Base: (Open Drive Chillers)
a. Chiller vibration isolation and the base type (i.e. floor pad) will be in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook, 2007, HVAC Applications,
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -15 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
Chapter 47 Table 48. Open drive centrifugal chillers shall require installation onto a base type "C" inertia base as defined by ASHRAE. This concrete base type "C" shall consist of a steel pouring form with welded-in reinforcing bars, provision for equipment hold-down, and isolator brackets. Hermetic centrifugal chillers require installation onto a base type "A" neoprene pads as defined by ASHRAE.
C. Variable Flow Rate Change Capabilities
1. All chillers applied in variable evaporator flow (VPF) system shall be able to withstand a chilled water flow rate-of-change of twenty five percent (25%) per minute while maintaining plus or minus two (+/- 2 F) of design supply chilled water temperature, and fifty percent (50%) per minute at any load above the compressor minimum without cycling "off" on low load (low leaving water temperature) or evaporator refrigerant temperature limit. If these tolerances can not be maintained the chiller manufacturer is responsible for costs associated with designing and implementing a controls system to accomplish the requirements.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform functional run tests of chillers before shipping.
B. Factory performance test chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590.
1. Test the following conditions:
a. The chillers design shall be capable of operating at 25% full load with 85 F entering condenser water temperature without surge or other harmful effects or erratic operation. If a variable speed drive is required to accomplish this requirement it must be provided. Hot gas bypass is NOT acceptable.
2. Prepare test report indicating test procedures, instrumentation, test conditions, and results. Submit copy of results within one week of test date.
C. For chillers located indoors, sound pressure level shall not exceed 84 dBA. If this level is exceeded, the manufacturer shall provide factory or field sound attenuation necessary to meet the specified sound pressure level requirement. Submittal data shall include certified sound pressure levels..
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION (RECEIVING, UNLOADING, AND INSTALLING READY FOR OPERATION AND TESTING)
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -16 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Align chiller package on concrete pad.
C. Install units on vibration isolators. Refer to Section 15242.
D. Connect to electrical service. Refer to Section 16180.
E. Connect to chilled and condenser water piping. Refer to Section 15510.
F. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning.
3.02 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Assemble components shipped separately, charge oil, and refrigerant.
B. Prepare, test, and start systems under provisions of Division 1 and Supplementary General Conditions.
C. Supply service of factory trained representative to perform testing, dehydration and charging of machine, start-up, and instruction on operation and maintenance to Owner.
D. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil, and perform application with factory trained Technicians.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Division 1.
B. Demonstrate system operation and verify specified performance. Refer to Section 15990.
3.04 TRAINING
A. Supplier shall provide as a part of the base bid, class maintenance and operation training of specified equipment, for two (2) personnel selected by the Owner. Cost of factory training is to be a part of this base bid. Training shall be a minimum of 8 hours classroom instruction in the Tampa Bay area at a facility approved by the Engineer-of-Record. Training program outline or agenda is to be pre-approved in writing by the Engineer of Record. The Manufacturer is to submit documents certifying such training has been received by the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Owner. These documents are to be signed by the Owner's Representative receiving such training and shall be submitted by the Owner and copied to the Engineer prior to receipt of final payment.
B. Supplier shall also provide up to eight (8) hours of training on site to the Owner's personnel after installation and start-up equipment.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -17 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Spare Parts: A complete list of all Manufacturer's recommended Owner stocked spare parts along with cost of each item shall be submitted to the Owner and Engineer upon delivery of equipment.
*** END OF SECTION ***
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER 15684 -18 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15920
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Variable Frequency Drives for variable speed HVAC pumps.
B. Variable Frequency Drives for variable speed Cooling Tower Fans.
C. Variable Frequency Drives for HVAC variable speed HVAC Air-Handlers.
D. Variable Frequency Drives for three (3) phase Relief Fans.
E. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS).
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. It is the intent of this specification for the Division 15 Contractor to provide the VFD equipment and Controls. It is the intent for the Division 16 Contractor to provide power for each drive.
B. Provide materials, equipment, labor, and start-up VFD manufacturers certified services necessary to integrate the VFD operation with the building management and digital electronic automatic control system and each intended variable speed motorized equipment.
C. All variable speed HVAC Pumps, Cooling Tower Fans and Air Handlers shall be provided with VFDs as specified here-in and as indicated on the equipment schedules and shall be provided with manual bypass.
D. All three phase power relief fans (RF-xx) indicated on the equipment schedules shall be provided with VFDs as specified here-in for the purposes of Test and Balancing. The Test and Balance (T&B) Contractor shall use the VFD in manual mode to adjust and accomplish the design building pressurization. Refer to Section 15990, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for more detail.
1.03 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 15170 ...... Motors.
B. Section 15190 ...... Mechanical Identification.
C. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) 15920-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
D. Section 15975 ...... Building Management and Automatic Temperature Control System.
E. Section 15990 ...... Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
F. Section 16600 ...... Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS).
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratory—U.L. 508.
B. NEMA KS 1—Enclosed Switches.
C. NEMA ICS 2—Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
D. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6—Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
E. ANSI/NEMA NEMA AB 1—Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Indicate on shop drawings, front and side views of motor control enclosures with overall dimensions. Include conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components.
C. Provide product data on contactors, keyed toggle switches, pilot devices, overcurrent protective devices, motor overloads, and TVSS devices.
D. Provide wiring diagrams for the entire assembly for shop drawing review and a laminated copy shall permanently attached to the inside of the door of the VFD enclosure or located next to the VFD on the wall in a tray. Provide holding tray as necessary.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. The direct digital portions shall be coordinated by the VFD manufacturers certified installer with the Building Management and Automatic Temperature Control System Contractor.
B. The power connection portions shall be coordinated by this Contractor with the Division 16 Electrical Contractor.
C. Coordination of all controls items with other trades shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) 15920-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
D. The VFD manufacturers certified start-up installer shall coordinate with the Test and Balance Contractor for the purposes of providing training to the T&B field technicians. This training shall teach T&B how to adjust and set the Relief Fans motor speed via the VFD manual mode, in order to setup the design building pressurization as required under Section 15990 .
1.07 SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE CONTRACT
A. SYSTEM WARRANTY
1. All VFDs provided by this Contractor shall be warranted to be free of defects in workmanship and material for a period of two (2) years from the date of the job acceptance (Final Substantial Completion) by the Owner and/or date of beneficial use. Any equipment found to be defective during this period shall be repaired or replaced without expense to the Owner. This work shall be accomplished by the Contractor during normal working hours (8 am to 5 pm, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays).
B. SERVICE ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS:
The Servicing Contractor shall meet all of the following requirements:
1. Have certified OEM factory-trained technicians experienced on the specific equipment needing repair. Service technicians to be equipped with laptop computers.
2. Provide for two (2) hour response time, 24 hours/day, 7 days/week to inspect down equipment and then repair to make equipment operational.
3. Maintain a complete stock of OEM parts, service, and repair manuals covering types and models of equipment owned by the Owner. It is unacceptable to remove a failed device and return it to the manufacturer for repair. Parts shall be replaced by local stock at the time of service call.
4. Have fully equipped service trucks and other equipment, including that necessary to comply with prudent and regulatory environmental requirements (including CFCs).
5. Maintain software library to support building automation system. Provide and install mandatory upgrades with 30 days of issue. All systems provided shall be the most current version and all units shall be the same version.
6. Provide local training on VFDs at no cost to Owner as stipulated herein.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) 15920-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HVAC PUMP AND COOLING TOWER VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) MOTOR SPEED CONTROLLER (Refer to Drawings for Voltage, Size, and Location found on Pump and/or Air Handling Unit and/or Cooling Tower Equipment Schedules)
A. Variable frequency drive and motor shall provide full motor nameplate rated horsepower as scheduled with no derating and shall be UL 508 listed.
B. The controller shall be furnished in a NEMA-1 enclosure and be configured as a motor starter and shall contain, in a single cabinet or frame, the following VFD components:
1. Input fused disconnect
2. Output thermal motor overloads
3. Output relays (2)
4. Output contactor
5. 3 phase input line reactor (3%)
6. DV/DT filter
C. VFD shall contain a 3-contactor bypass or 2-contactor bypass to line circuitry in the same cabinet as the VFD components. Electronic bypass is accepted.
D. VFD shall contain circuitry to automatically restart after input power outage. This circuitry shall be contained in the same cabinet as the VFD components.
E. The variable frequency controller shall convert 460 VAC, +10% (unless otherwise scheduled on the drawings), three phase, 50/60 hertz utility power to variable voltage/frequency, three phase A-C power pulse width modulation for motor speed control. The drive shall have one minute rating of 110% of rated current. The controller shall be of the pulse width modulated (PWM) type.
F. The variable frequency controller shall have three sections as follows:
1. Converter:
a. Modularized three phase, full wave, half control thyristor bridge
b. D-C Choke
c. Filter Capacity Assembly
d. Module Fan
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) 15920-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2. Inverter:
a. Three identical output power modules.
G. The variable frequency controller shall have the following basic functions:
1. Start/stop and speed selection.
2. VFD Auto/Manual Bypass/Off .
3. Auto operation VIA 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 10 VDC control systems.
4. Jog.
5. Linear timed acceleration and deceleration.
6. 10:1 Controlled speed range (6-60 HZ).
7. Minimum and maximum adjustable speed set limits.
8. Manual operation: Turn POT to adjust output.
9. Digital display of output frequency, voltage, current. No percentage readings are acceptable.
H. The variable frequency controller shall have the following protective devices and/or features:
1. Input magnetic circuit breaker.
2. A-C overload function which continuously monitors output current and shuts down D-C module gate signals if motor current exceeds 225% of controller full load current rating.
3. D-C bus disable is a multi-activated monitoring function which shuts down the gate drive to the D- C module effectively disabling the D-C module and reducing the A-C output voltage to zero. The D-C disable ramps the controller down to a standby frequency whenever any of the conditions occur which activate the D-C disable is activated under the following protective trip conditions:
a. Low input line voltage.
b. A-C overload.
c. D-C current trip.
d. Loss of input or output phase.
4. Test points for each power module phase.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) 15920-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
5. NEMA-1 Construction.
6. Peak load rating of 225% of rated current for ten seconds.
7. Current limited acceleration.
8. Voltage limited deceleration.
9. Auto/Bypass/Off hardware selector switch with run 'Auto' and run 'Manual' pilot lights.
I. The variable frequency controller shall have the following adjustable controls:
1. Volts/Hertz
2. Voltage Boost
3. Acceleration
4. Deceleration
J. The three phase 3% impedance input line reactor shall be provided to minimize drive harmonics on the AC line and protect the drive from damaging electrical system transients.
K. Provide a DV/DT filter to provide motor protection from the VFD. Output filter shall have the following characteristics and shall provide common mode reduction, peak voltage protection, and rise time reduction, all in one unit:
DV/DT filter shall be Model DV Sentry filter by MTE.
Input Voltage ...... 380V – 600V, 50/60 Hz
Current Range ...... 3A – 600A
Available Form Factors ...... Panel NEMA 1/2 NEMA 3R
Max Peak Motor Voltage ...... 150% of DC bus voltage at 1000 feet
Rise Time ...... Less than 0.1uS
Insertion Loss ...... No more than 1.7% at 60 Hz No more than 2.6% at 90 Hz
Intermittent Current Ratings ...... 150% continuous RMS (1 minute) 200% continuous RMS (10 seconds)
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) 15920-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
Carrier Frequency Range ...... 3A – 110A: 900 Hz – 10kHz (up to 14 kHz with de-rating) 130A – 600A: 900 Hz – 5kHz
Motor Frequency ...... Up to 90 Hz without de-rating Up to 120 Hz with de-rating
Agency Approvals ...... UL, cUL, CE, and RoHS
Motor Audible Noise ...... Less than 65 dB
Service Temperature ...... Enclosed -40C to 50C Open -40C to 60C
Warranty ...... THREE years from the date of shipment
L. Manufacturer
1. Basis of Design
a. ASEA Brown Boveri (ABB).
2. Pre-approved Substitutes (Approved to Bid)
a. Yasakawa/Magnetec.
b. Reliance Electric.
3. Other Substitutes
a. Submit a written substitution request, prior to bid, to the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 15010. Accepted substitutes will be notified via Addendum.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.01 CONTROL MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND START-UP REQUIREMENTS
A. The VFD control sequences indicated in the drawings and specifications show the intended sequences of operation of the various control systems and shall be followed completely, deviations are not acceptable.
B. Division 15 Mechanical Contractor shall field coordinate exact placement of the VFDs and coordination with the Division 16 Electrical Contractor and other trades to provide 42 inches of clear maintenance access in front of the VFD. If VFDs are to be installed above the ceiling, the VFDs shall be provided with a minimum 24”x24” access door centered in front of the VFD for maintenance.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) 15920-7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.
D. General: Provide field testing and adjustment of the complete VFD systems, operational acceptance test of the complete operational System. The Owner may witness all tests.
E. Field Test: When installation and integration of the system is complete, verify communication operation before the system is placed on line. All testing, adjusting, and final field tests shall be completed by the Manufacturer Certified Start-up Representative. Provide a cross check of each control point by making a comparison between the control demand at the Master VFD. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure and hand mode Submit the results of functional, cross and diagnostic tests.
F. The VFD manufacturers certified installer shall test the entire system with the Controls Contractor to verify the integration of the systems and document point by point operation of all controls. Perform all required continuity testing of conductors prior to final connection to control equipment. On-site training shall not begin until the system has been accepted by the Engineer and field verifications completed.
3.02 TRAINING
A. Training: On-site training shall be provided for up to 6 of the Owner's representatives. This training shall be completed in one 4-hour session. The training shall focus on the specific installation and shall address both hardware and software. This training shall be completed after local training and after substantial completion. Specific as-built documentation for this project shall be used for reference as a part of this training.
B. For all levels of training, a sign-off sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer certifying that each individual has completed such training to acceptance of individual. Hours of instruction received shall be a part of the sign- off sheet.
C. It shall be the Owner's responsibility to provide adequate time for attendance at all training sessions.
D. Training Aids: Provide an “Owner’s Copy” factory prepared DVD describing in layman’s terms the complete operation of the system. This DVD shall be professionally made by the manufacturer of the system. DVDS (home made) locally are not acceptable. Provide a copy of this DVD with the submittal package to the Engineer for approval prior to proceeding.
*** END OF SECTION ***
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) 15920-8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15975
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.00 SCOPE SUMMARY
A. Provide upgrades to existing Trane HVAC Controls Systems at the Venice Campus and at the Bradenton Campus. Refer to Drawing M-402 for scope summary. Provide a Building Automation System (BAS) based on Direct Digital Control (DDC) concepts with a three Tiered hierarchy. This specification is based on a Trane SC/ES Control System. All field devices and sequence requirements stipulated on the documents shall be a part of this specification.
B. All devices and interconnections necessary to make the BAS fully operable shall be provided by the controls provider whether specifically called for in this specification or not – ancillary devices needed to make the system operational (such as relays; pull boxes; conduits; etc.) shall be provided by the controls provider.
C. Coordinate with the Mechanical systems provider to ensure requirements of the field sensing devices are properly installed per the sensor Manufacturer’s published accuracies and turndown ratios.
D. Control system communication buss wiring shall comply with Communication products and installation requirements. All cables shall be dressed and permanently labeled at each end using approved labels to ensure a neat and organized appearance. Provide CAT rated cables unless otherwise stipulated or approved by the Engineer of Record.
E. Control system field sensor wiring shall be per the sensor Manufacturer’s requirements. All cables shall be dressed and permanently labeled at each end using approved labels to ensure a neat and organized appearance.
F. Trane ES Control System shall be installed at the Venice Campus CEP and networked to the existing SCF ES server.
G. Provide graphic screens depicting specific equipment operations. Coordinate with the Engineer of Record on key points to be included on the various graphics during the installation and throughout the Warranty period.
H. Provide a log of all calibration verifications to the Engineer of Record upon request – to include: date of the calibration; readings of the field sensor before calibration; readings of the field sensor after calibration; and the instrument(s) used to calibrate the field device (Model and serial number).
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section—Building Automation System for HVAC (BAS).
1.02 COORDINATION
A. Division 15 Mechanical Contractor shall receive, handle, mount and install automatic temperature control valves, separable wells for immersion elements and couplings for flow and pressure switches.
B. Mechanical Contractor or the sheet metal subcontractor shall install all automatic dampers. It shall be the responsibility of the mechanical Contractor or his sheet metal subcontractor to provide and install blank-off plates when the control application requires dampers smaller than duct size.
C. The direct digital portions and automatic temperature control system shall be installed by the BAS Controls Contractor.
D. Coordination of all controls items with other trades shall be the responsibility of the Controls Contractor.
1.03 TEST
A. The Control Contractor shall test the entire system and document point by point operation of all controls. Perform all required continuity testing of conductors prior to final connection to control equipment.
B. Prior to Substantial Completion, a Static Controls Validation (SCV) shall be completed. SCV shall be defined to mean that all field modules are operating, all field I/O points are operable and reading common sense values, and have been calibrated. Any points identified during the SCV that are either not reading correct values, are not present, or are in error, shall be added to the Substantial Completion Punchlist. No sequencing operations are included as a part of the SCV.
C. After Substantial Completion, a Dynamic Controls Validation (DCV) shall begin. The DCV shall be carried as a Substantial Completion Punchlist item as "to be completed." The DCV shall continue throughout the warranty period or as such time the sequencing is deemed complete in the opinion of the Engineer-of-Record.
1.04 CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENT
A. After completion of the installation, perform calibration and adjustments of the Automatic Temperature Control equipment provided under this contract, and supply services incidental to the proper performance of the temperature control system under the warranty below.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.05 SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE CONTRACT
A. SYSTEM WARRANTY
All temperature control devices provided by this Contractor shall be warranted to be free of defects in workmanship and material for a period of two (2) years from the date of the job acceptance (Final Substantial Completion) by the Owner and/or date of beneficial use. Any equipment found to be defective during this period shall be repaired or replaced without expense to the Owner. This work shall be accomplished by the Contractor during normal working hours (8 am to 5 pm, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays). If sequential and/or multiple Substantial Completion dates are set during construction, then the latest Substantial Completion date shall be used as the start of the Warranty period.
B. PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTIONS
Two (2) year preventative maintenance and service inspections shall be included within the scope of the work specified herein and shall consist of the following:
Coverage to start at the last Substantial Completion date.
The Controls Contractor shall be responsible for all defects or failures throughout the warranty period (parts and labor).
C. SERVICE ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS:
The Servicing Contractor shall meet all of the following requirements:
1. Have certified OEM factory-trained technicians experienced on the specific equipment needing repair. Service technicians to be equipped with laptop computers.
2. Provide for two (2) hour response time, 24 hours/day, 7 days/week to inspect down equipment and then repair to make equipment operational.
3. Maintain a complete stock of OEM parts, service, and repair manuals covering types and models of equipment owned by the Owner. It is unacceptable to remove a failed device and return it to the manufacturer for repair. Parts shall be replaced by local stock at the time of service call.
4. Have fully equipped service trucks and other equipment, including that necessary to comply with prudent and regulatory environmental requirements (including CFCs).
5. Maintain software library to support building automation system. Provide and install mandatory upgrades with 30 days of issue. All systems provided shall be the most current version and all units shall be the same version.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT
A. The following data/information shall be submitted for approval prior to ordering parts or beginning work at the site:
1. Complete description of operation. Include an overall system interconnect diagram showing all remote panels and power/surge protection locations.
2. Control system drawings including all pertinent data to provide a functional operating system.
3. Valve, humidifier and damper schedules showing size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment.
4. Data sheets for all hardware and software control components.
5. A description of the installation materials including conduit, wire, flex, etc.
6. Thermostat/sensor locations.
7. Distributed panel locations.
8. Provide as part of the submittal five copies of all data.
9. Detailed point-to-point diagram of circuitry of all DDC panels. Submit on a per distributed panel basis.
10. List of connected data points, including connected control unit and input or output device.
11. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data connected and calculated point addresses, and operator notations, as-built. Graphics shall be available for Owner and Engineer of Record review using live data via modem hook-up to the site. Not required at submittal approval time except as listed below.
12. Descriptive data and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software.
13. Detailed documentation on the specific field equipment to be supplied by the controls Contractor shall be submitted and approved prior to installation; including, but not limited to, actuators, valves, temperature sensors, and damper operators.
14. All schemes and methods proposed to provide lightning protection entering and leaving each building shall be submitted for review and approval.
15. Locations of each control panel, gateway module, override panels on a 24” x 36” drawing or larger floor plan. Submit panel layouts for each.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
16. The Owner and Engineer of Record shall have access to the proposed Graphic Screens prior to the first Substantial Completion date. It is anticipated there will be changes to the graphics throughout the Warranty period. Such changes are considered a part of the basic Scope of Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.00 HIERARCHY
A. The control system shall consist of three basic tiers.
1. Tier 1:
a. This Tier is the lowest tier and shall be located on site.
b. Binary and analog field devices and equipment components shall be interfaced to the control system at this tier.
c. Provide field modules located throughout the project selected to meet the number and type of interfaces required. No field module shall be loaded to more than 75% of its software or hardware capacity for any field data type.
d. The field modules at this tier shall be interfaced to a common communication trunk(s) shared by Tier 1 and Tier 2 modules. Data shall be shared amongst the modules and tiers using the communication trunk.
e. All tools (software and hardware) necessary to locally access, monitor, and modify these modules shall be provided to the Owner and the Engineer of Record as a part of this Scope; including, but not limited to: graphics building tools, programming tools, and local laptop software tools.
2. Tier 2:
a. The second tier shall be located on site.
b. This Tier shall communicate with Tier 1, Tier 2 and Tier 3 devices.
c. This tier shall be capable of serving Web based graphics if no third tier is provided using an Ethernet connection methodology. All graphics screens available on the Tier 2 devices shall also coexist at the Tier 3 level.
d. The services required for this tier are to be provided by Trane SC controller(s). The number of SC controllers shall be provided such that the needs of the current project are satisfied with 50% remaining memory capacity and 50% field module connection capacity.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
e. All tools (software and hardware) necessary to locally access, monitor, and modify these modules shall be provided to the Owner and the Engineer of Record as a part of this Scope using an owner provided basic workstation with IE browser installed.
3. Tier 3 (Enterprise Server, ES):
a. The third tier provides Enterprise Level functions consistent with that of a multi-campus owner/user. The basis of this Scope is to use the existing ES software system currently in use by State College of Florida.
b. The Tier 3 services shall include, but are not limited to: Trending; Alarming; Graphics interface; Report Manager (Building Reports, managing reports, e-mailing reports, etc.), and messaging.
c. The ES server software shall be upgraded to the most current revision offered by the Manufacturer as a part of this Scope. Compatibility, or otherwise adverse effects, of this upgrade at other currently connected sites shall be remedied at no additional cost to the Owner.
d. All graphics screens available on the Tier 2 devices shall also coexist at the Tier 3 level.
2.01 FUNCTIONALITY
A. An operator shall be able to logon to the system using a standard web browser (IE or Safari), and without requiring system vendor-proprietary software installed on the user’s PC or mobile device to allow access to all appropriate data and control functions.
B. Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the basic control functions necessary for control of systems defined for control on this project.
C. The ES control system shall be configured to provide a minimum of five (5) individual user profiles.
D. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited by operator password. An operator shall be able to log onto any computer’s internet connection and have access to all designated data.
E. The Tier 1 and Tier 2 control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of other controllers, the control system shall continue to independently operate the unaffected equipment.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
F. Communication between the control panels shall be over dedicated high-speed network (trunk). All nodes on this network shall be peers. A network communications card, embedded or discrete, shall be provided for each building control panel provided as part of the system installation.
G. All cabling of the network shall use structured cabling techniques as per manufacturer.
H. The system is based on a Trane Tracer ES/SC control system. Refer to the equipment schedules, flow diagrams, sequence of operation and input/output summary list as applicable to this project. The Mechanical Contractor is responsible for all coordination and scheduling of the control subcontractor. The Mechanical contractor shall include in the bid all costs (mark-ups, overhead and profit) associated with managing/coordinating the controls subcontractor.
I. The Tier 1 and Tier 2 system shall consist of a distributed processor direct digital control system utilizing electronic actuation. The system shall be fully integrated with the chillers, pumps, cooling towers, and all CEP equipment.
J. All electric control and interlock wiring in connection with the controls and instrumentation system shall be furnished by this Contractor. Power wiring to the various control devices shall be provided by this Contractor and coordinated with the Electrical Contractor prior to Bid to ensure adequate spare dedicated circuits are available.
K. Provide a system interface and the required access to Engineering Matrix so that monitoring can be done between the project and the Engineer's office during the course of construction and throughout the warranty period. The intent is to allow the Engineer priority access during system installation, startup, demonstration and warranty period.
1. The Engineer shall also be able to use the system remotely in order to check/confirm the results of the test and balance reports in a random basis.
2. Sufficient access shall be provided to allow full programming capability; to include, but not limited to: graphics programming language, module libraries, etc. Any necessary software “tools”, graphics development packages, or other programming software packages not available on-line shall be provided to the Engineer of Record which shall return any tangible products to the Owner at the end of the Warranty period. This access shall include all Tiers of the hierarchy.
3. The Engineer shall have the highest level of BAS access available at all Tiers.
L. Integration coordination of VFDs, power meter(s), etc., shall be the responsibility of the Controls Contractor.
M. Control Contractor shall complete all installations including electric and electronic components—not the Mechanical Contractor.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.02 DDC PANELS (MICROPROCESSOR BASED DDC PANELS)
Provide independent, stand alone, microprocessor based control panels in order to provide centralized control of each major piece of HVAC equipment. These panels shall communicate with the operator via the Communications Network CPU/Graphics Software. Both text and graphics interface shall be provided.
A. The DDC panel shall contain the necessary hardware and firmware to interface the building input/output devices to the CPU over a communications channel.
Each DDC panel shall be a stand alone in a standard assembly packaged in a NEMA 1 enclosure complete with power supplies, card cage, interface cards and termination points. Each remote shall be capable of accepting combinations of input sensors and output controls.
As many DDC panels as required shall be furnished to provide the monitoring and control functions and capabilities specified. The panel shall be strategically located in areas of the building that are easily accessible for maintenance and repair.
Any software edit changes in a DDC panel by the Owner shall be available to the Owner. The Owner shall not be tied to the manufacturer for those changes.
If the manufacturer's panel does not have the ability to provide the minimum point requirement, then additional panels shall be provided adjacent to the first unit in order to meet the intent of the spec. No exception to this statement shall be acceptable in order to protect the Owner's interest for future additions.
Provide at chillers and boiler a dedicated DDC panel complete with LCD display and keyboard. To provide local display and adjustment of all inputs, outputs, alarm messages and setpoints. A key lock shall protect the internal DDC panel components.
Provide sufficient ROM, for operating system and PID algorithms. Protect processor cards and memory with internal grounding. Store setpoints and default parameters in a non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
B. INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE
Each point on each interface card is to be characterized as to its point type, sensor range, status, and scale range in the on-line software data base edit. Revisions or modifications to these parameters shall be entered by the system operator through the PC keyboard.
To gather sensor data and interface with controlled equipment, the DDC panel shall use an internal multiplex design. This design shall allow each panel to accommodate different types of points using any of the following input/output options:
Digital Input Options—Monitor the open/closed status of a switch or relay.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
Analog Input Options—Monitor analog values of voltage, current and resistance from temperature, pressure and humidity sensors, etc.
Digital Output Options—Control on/off, start/stop relays.
Analog Output Options—Supply voltage or current outputs to controllers.
C. DIGITAL INPUT (DI)
The digital inputs must be isolated contact closures and can either be normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC).
Points must be transient protected on all points to meet IEEE C37.90a-1974.
Digital input points shall monitor the open/close status of switches or relays. Digital inputs must be isolated contact closures, but normally open or normally closed contacts can be intermixed.
Monitoring voltage is 12 VDC at 12 mA per zone. Two #18 AWG wires are required per point. Points are to be transient protected to meet IEEE 472-1974.
D. ANALOG INPUT
The analog inputs can be voltage, current or resistance.
The analog input cards monitor values from temperature, pressure, humidity, and other analog sensors.
Analog inputs can be linear or non-linear. Points shall include a minimum 12-bit A/D converter (ADC) and an analog power supply. All points shall be wired to the input panels using wiring no less than that required by the sensor manufacturer.
Provide a minimum 12-bit ADC on all AIs.
For non-linear AI sensors, provide the inherent non-linear profile of the device (such as thermistors, non-linear CO2 sensors, etc.), the linearization table (for lookup table conversions embedded in the DDC input panel) or equation embedded in the DDC panel (for equation curve-fitting of the input signals) upon which the input is converted to engineering units. Provide the range of the sensor that corresponds to the full input range of the DDC input device.
E. DIGITAL OUTPUT
The digital outputs shall drive control on/off, start/stop relays which have low voltage coils. The control relays must have a minimum contract rating of 120 VAC, 5 amp, and 1/3 HP. Provide manual override switches in order to enable the operator to override the control status of each load.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-9 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
F. ANALOG OUTPUT
The analog outputs supply voltage or current outputs to devices. The analog outputs shall be a standard 4-20 mA proportional signal. The analog output D/A conversion shall have 10-bit resolution minimum. All output points to valves shall read as a percent open.
G. KW INPUT
KW power inputs for all meters on site shall be provided. Inputs shall be pulse type. This Contractor shall coordinate pulse requirements with the power company and provide all necessary hardware to interface with the power company. Individual meter KW readings shall be provided as well as a sum total calculation for the site.
H. PACKAGING AND ENVIRONMENT
Distributed DDC panel enclosures shall be locking type, metal cabinet, with common keying. The panels have a metal print pocket suitable for storing wiring, service and log information.
The panel, when required, must functionally operate over the temperature range -30 degrees F to 120 degrees F and the humidity range 10 - 90% non-condensing. Storage temperature shall be -50 degrees F to 150 degrees F.
DDC panels shall come with a minimum of six pre-existing available knockouts for ease of wiring during installation. Panels shall have an on/off switch and shall be fused for power protection.
The electrical requirements shall be provided by this Contractor. Any 120 VAC requirements are to be coordinated with the Division 16 Contractor prior to bid. Power circuit to each panel shall be provided by Division 16 Contractor.
I. FIELD PANELS (FPS)
The Field Panels (referred to as FPs) shall be distributed standalone controller specifically designed to control the various HVAC equipment as specified herein.
Each FP shall be capable of communicating with main DDC controller panels over a twisted pair of wires. Provide at each panel an operator interface in the form of a front panel liquid crystal display with keypad. The display and keypad shall allow display and local adjustment of FPs operating parameters and setpoints.
Each FP shall have a minimum of 6 programmable/configurable PID loops.
The analog inputs shall be individually selectable for resistance inputs, 4 to 20 mA, 200 ohm input impedance and 0 to 10 VDC.
The binary outputs shall drive dry contact low coil voltage relays with normally open and normally closed (Form C) contacts. The contacts shall be rated at 120 VAC, 5 amps.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-10 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
The analog outputs shall provide a continuous signal and are individually selectable as either 0-10 VDC or a 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA (both into a 500 ohm impedance).
Provide at each FP address dip switches for setting the communication link address. In addition, provide at each FP an RS 232 interface port for connection of a FP edit software for use with a portable laptop computer.
Damper operators shall be of two (2) types; modulating or two-position depending on the sequence of operation. Two-position operators shall be spring return type and the modulating operators shall be capable of accepting a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal with a gear de-engagement clutch on the operator cover. For modulating operators provide feedback potentiometer internal to the actuator for positive positioning.
2.03 TRANSIENT PROTECTION
A. All communication channels, whether in conduits or overhead runs, shall have transient suppression networks installed. The transient protection must meet IEEE standard C37.90a-1974. The suppression network shall be automatic, self-restoring and be on duty at all times.
B. Surge suppression shall comply at minimum with manufacturers requirements and is to include suppression on all lines entering/leaving each building.
2.04 SOFTWARE
Provide the following software features for the operation of the system:
A. PASSWORD SECURITY
The system security software shall provide the means for ensuring secure operation of the system. In doing so, the system security software shall perform the following:
1. All system editing, control operations, and alarm acknowledgment shall be subject to access authorization prior to allowing such operations to take place.
2. Defining and modifying system password and access assignments shall only be accomplished by the Building Owner, Engineer, or Designee.
3. Associated with each password shall be an access code and level of authorization.
B. APPLICATION SOFTWARE
The application software includes in general the control functions which permit the operator to control the system, and access the associated application parameters. In addition, the interaction between application programs provides the strategy for orderly management of the system as well as the following:
1. Maximum energy conservation
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-11 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2. Minimum occupant discomfort
3. Unnecessary equipment cycling
All application program editing must be accessible to the Owner and the Owner's personnel who have the proper password authority. All displays necessary to create and edit the system are provided. All editing is done in English by using the menu format and by answering prompted questions. All software programming of sequences shall be done in text and shall be on-line with no intermediate compilations required.
C. PROGRAMMED SCHEDULING
The system shall provide the ability to automatically start up and shut down individual pieces of equipment by zone grouping based on a particular time of day. In addition, the ability to disable alarming and application control for a particular load as a function of the time-of-day is also required. All time programmed control will be done in accordance with the operator specified schedules.
There shall be a minimum of 32 master zone schedules of eight days each.
There shall be at least one schedule for each day of the week. The capability to schedule holidays and special days a minimum of one year in advance shall be included. The priorities of the time program functions relative to the other application programs shall be operator definable. The program shall have the capability of being down-loaded to all programmable remotes.
D. DEMAND LIMITING AND LOAD SHEDDING
Peak demand control shall be accomplished by monitoring the power consumption of each metered power feed device. The program shall constantly compare the actual peak demand to the operator established limits. Upon reaching limits, configurable priority loads as defined by user shall be shed on a rolling basis.
The program shall use an averaging technique that will offset the effects of demand spikes and the resultant over-shedding of loads.
The operator shall have the ability to define each load to be used for load shedding. In addition, the demand limiting program shall have as a minimum four priority groups. Each load in a particular group shall be rotated with other loads in the same group.
The program shall accommodate time of day demand limits.
There shall be a minimum of 2 time of day intervals with independent, unique limits for weekdays, Saturdays, and Sundays.
The program shall accommodate multiple meters as inputs to the software. It shall be capable of treating each independently. Associated system software shall be capable of treating them as a single sum.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-12 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
E. RUN TIME AND MAINTENANCE
The system shall provide the ability to accumulate equipment run time for operator specified equipment.
When equipment run time exceeds an operator-specified limit, the system shall alarm the condition and print and sequentially number the maintenance order automatically for the specific piece of equipment. The system shall provide a summary of all points currently assigned to the run time program as well as their current run time values. Run time limits shall be enforceable on either an hourly or calendar date basis.
The operator shall have the ability to define or modify any of the maintenance messages to be used by the run time program.
F. REPORTS AND LOGS
The system shall provide management reports and logs detailing certain system performance characteristics.
The system shall have the ability to history trend a minimum of 250 different I/O or internally calculated points. The points shall be operator selectable and shall be a mix/match of the system points as selected by the operator. The operator shall also be able to select the sampling/storage trending time frequency. The minimum sample time frequency must be no greater than 10 minute intervals for 25 of the points and 5 minutes for the remaining points. A minimum of 200 samples for each point shall be trended.
The data or the trend history must be capable of being stored in a spreadsheet compatible file format (Microsoft Excel, latest version).
G. GRAPHICS GENERATION PACKAGE
1. Provide dynamic color graphics. Use text fields generally to indicate status. Any elements on the graphics that are moving to indicate status shall also be provided with text status as well (ex: using a dynamically circulating fan element to indicate status of the fan shall be accompanied with an appropriate ON/OFF text status). The intent is to allow screen snapshots at a moment in time to be taken and the status of all elements on the graphic screen may be easily discerned.
2. Dynamic Graphic Software
a. Provide as part of this program an automatic refresh rate for all graphic displays. The automatic refresh rate shall be no less than (20) seconds for all system points being displayed. A graphic mode's pop-up menu shall be provided for accessible selection of available functions in a tiered top/down structure.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-13 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3. Color Graphic Display Linkage Editor
a. Provide, as part of the basic Scope of Work a graphics generation program, a color graphic display linkage editor which assigns ("links") the appropriate graphic display files to the correct screen graphics. The linkage editor shall also provide the operator with the ability to define the display sequence that is followed when the next and previous function keys are utilized.
4. Graphic Requirements
As a part of the requirements of this section, provide a series of logically ordered dynamic graphics as described in paragraph H.1 for each BAS remote. There shall be as a minimum a dynamic graphic for each of the following:
a. Site Plan Graphic
Provide a site plan of the project indicating location of chiller plant, major mechanical equipment, PCs, and electric power meter(s). The site plan graphics shall also have easily identifiable ICONS and target points.
b. CEP Graphic
Provide a CEP layout indicating location of all major equipment. The CEP graphics shall have easily identifiable ICONS and target points.
c. Equipment Graphic
Provide a dashboard graphic to display all DDC data associated with each individual piece of equipment.
d. Dashboard Graphic
Provide a dashboard graphic to display all power consumption information as follows:
(1) equipment status
(2) chiller RLAs
(3) chiller calculated tons
(4) CWP amps
(5) Pump VFD interface
(6) CT % VFD
(7) main utility meter kw/kwh metering
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-14 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.05 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES
A. AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES AND OPERATORS
1. The Control Contractor shall furnish all the control valves of the type indicated on the drawings for installation by the Mechanical Contractor.
2. All modulating straight-through water valves shall be provided with equal- percentage contoured throttling plugs. All modulating three-way mixing valves shall be provided with linear V-port plugs or equal percentage flow characterized ball valve type, such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position. All diverting valves shall have two V-port plugs.
3. Valves 2" and smaller shall have brass or bronze bodies with screwed ends. Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall have iron bodies brass or bronze trimming with flanged ends. Valves shall be factory rated to withstand the pressures encountered. Valves shall have stainless steel stems and spring loaded Teflon packing.
4. Air handling unit water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs or equal percentage flow characterized ball valve type. Valves and operators shall be capable of close-off pressures equal to or exceeding the dead head pressure of the largest pump within the system or 60 psi, whichever is greater and shall be sized a minimum of 125 percent of the highest actual operating pressure of the system (25% safety factor).
5. All automatic control valves shall be fully modulating type unless specified otherwise in the Sequence of Operations or on the drawings.
6. All control valves shall be designed to fail as follows:
Cooling - Fail fully open to coil
Heating - Fail fully closed to coil
7. Each valve operator shall be 4-20 mA type, with spring return and a 0 – 5 VDC feedback signal. Contractor shall provide feedback wiring, terminations, graphics, and control logic connected to DDC input board (analog signal), on all automatic control valves in the chiller plant and/or heating plant (except at air handlers) wherever it applies to this project, for positive feedback of valve position.
8. Operators shall be by Belimo.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-15 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
1. Differential pressure switches shall be furnished as indicated by the sequence for status purposes for either air or water applications. Provide single pole double throw switch with fully adjustable differential pressure settings. The switch shall have a snap-acting Form C contact rated for the application. The switch contact shall be rated for 5 amps at 120 volts as a minimum. Units shall be selected for ranges consistent with the application and shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
a. Dwyer and Cleveland products are acceptable manufacturers.
C. ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS
1. For water applications (hot water, chilled water, glycol mixed in water, and steam applications). Provide:
a. 100 Ohm thin-film Platinum RTD sensors in thermowells, UON.
b. Sensors shall be directly interfaced into the Tier 1 devices.
c. Provide interface wiring with no splices from sensor leads to input panel(s).
d. Stipulate Minimum configuration spans that correspond to the full ADC input range. No less than .1 Degrees per state of resolution (configured span / distinctly different transition states discernable from the ADC) shall be used.
2. For room sensing and air temperature sensing applications, provide:
a. Sensors shall be calibrated to less than or equal to a 1/4 degree F resolution for the specific application. Thermistor sensors are approved for VAV zone or room sensing only. Substitutions must be approved by the Engineer.
b. All sensors to be field calibration verified and if adjustments are necessary, they shall be configured in software.
c. Document field sensor calibrations…refer to Part 3.
3. Use insertion elements in ducts not affected by temperature stratification or smaller than one square meter. Use averaging elements where larger or prone to stratification sensor length 2.5 m or 5 m as required.
4. Insertion elements for liquids shall be with brass separable socket (thermowell) with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches (60 mm) or suitable for small line sizes. No strap-on sensors shall be allowed.
5. Supply room sensors with tamper proof cover.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-16 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
6. Provide outside air sensors with watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct rays of sun, mounted on the North side of the facility.
7. Provide a battery operated, portable temperature sensor at the job site to be used The transmitter/sensor shall be field calibrated by the Installing Contractor to transmit a 4-20 mA signal at the corresponding temperature ranges. The Installing Contractor shall calibrate transmitter in field with a precision grade substitution resistance box and two (2) decimal place minimum digital ammeter test circuit. Test transmitter at three (3) temperature points minimum. Engineer will spot check verify these calibrations during walk through inspection.
8. Wall mounted sensor shall be mounted at 5'-6" above finished floor in an area which free air current is not constricted or blocked, final location shall be approved by the Owner and Engineer prior to installation.
D. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) MOTOR SPEED CONTROLLER (Refer to Drawings for Voltage, Size, and Location found on Equipment Schedules)
E. CONTROL WIRING
1. All conductors shall be of stranded copper wire.
2. All EMT/conduit and outlet boxes shall conform to the requirements of the manufacturer.
3. All cables run exposed in return air plenums shall be smoke rated for the application. Do not run wire in drywall without conduit.
4. All wiring cables shall have 600 volt insulation.
5. Cables shall be properly identified/tagged as to the control point.
6. All cables from ceilings to wall temperature sensors shall be installed in conduit (EMT).
F. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER/ORIFICE FLOW STATION
1. Transmitter: Provide a Rosemount Model 1151DP Alphaline Flange- mounted Differential Pressure Transmitter with all necessary installation hardware (seals, flanges, etc.). Unit shall be mounted at eye level for ease of calibration. Contractor shall calibrate instrument for 4-20 mA output (input into building control system). Coordinate the transmitter range with the requirements of the mechanical system prior to submitting shop drawings. The mounting flange shall be 150 psi rating class, 316 stainless steel. Sensor module and low side materials shall be 316 stainless steel. The high pressure side process fill shall be capable of air operating range of 0-200F. Provide unit with LCD display, 0-100%. This Contractor shall provide power as required. Make all final piping connections to transmitter.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-17 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2. Orifice Plate: Furnish and install as shown on plans, a cast iron wafer-type flow meter designed for low pressure drop operation. The flow meter will be equipped with brass readout valves (with integral check valve) for taking differential pressure readings across the orifice of the flow meter. The flow meter shall be designed to operate at a maximum working pressure of 300 psig at 250F. The flow meter must be furnished with a calibrated nameplate for determining an accurate system flowrate. Each flow meter shall be ITT Bell & Gossett Circuit Sensor Flow Meter Model No. OP-4A or approved equal.
G. WATER FLOW METER
1. Furnish turbine flow or magnetic flow sensors complete with hot tap full port ball valve and installation hardware. Paddle type rotors will not be acceptable. Turbine flow sensors shall be dual-turbine UON on the documents. Each sensor shall be individually calibrated and tagged accordingly against the manufacturers primary standards which must be accurate to within 0.1% traceable to the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
2. The sensor shall have a maximum operating pressure of 400 PSI, maximum operating temperature of 220 degrees F, (optional 300 degrees F) and a pressure drop of less than 1 PSI at 17 feet per second flow rate. Flow sensor shall have 100: 1 turndown ratio. Accuracy shall be + 2% of actual reading from 0.4 feet per second to 20.0 feet per second.
3. The sensor shall have integral analog outputs of 0 to 10 vdc and 4-20 m A current output for connection to the DDC system. All sensor outputs to the DDC field panels shall be linear with flow.
4. Install per the manufacturer’s requirements. See Part 3 of this specification for further details.
H. CURRENT SWITCHES
1. Provide a solid state switch which when the current level sensed by the internal current transformer exceeds the adjustable trip point. Internal circuits are to be totally powered by induction from the line being monitored. Provide a zero off-state leakage in the solid-state relay output, while switching both AC and DC circuits. Provide an LED that will show three pieces of information (Rapid Flashing-switch is tripped, Slow Flashing-current is present but below the trip point and no Flashing-current is either off or below the bottom of the range) and permits setting the trip point adjustment prior to system connection.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-18 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
I. MAKE-UP WATER METER
1. Furnish an approved single turbine flow sensor complete with hot tap full port ball valve and installation hardware. Paddle type rotors will not be acceptable. Rotational sensing of the turbine shall be accomplished electronically by sensing impedance change and not with magnetic or photoelectric means. Each sensor shall be individually calibrated and tagged accordingly against the manufacturers primary standards, which must be accurate to within 0.1% traceable to the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
2. The sensor shall have a maximum operating pressure of 227 PSI, maximum operating temperature of 250 degrees F, (optional 300 degrees F) and a pressure drop of less than 1 PSI at 17 feet per second flow rate. Flow sensor shall have 32: 1 turndown ratio. Accuracy shall be +/- 1% of actual reading from 0.4 feet per second to 20.0 feet per second.
3. The sensor shall have integral analog outputs of 0 to 24 vdc and/or 4-20 m A current output for connection to the DDC system. The sensor shall also include an internal frequency output consisting of 0 to 15 VDC pulses for diagnostics purposes and for connection to peripheral equipment (local display, BTU meter, etc.). All outputs shall be linear with flow.
4. The turbine element shall have EDPM o-ring seals. be made of polypropylene (optional polsulfone) with sapphire jewel bearings and tungsten carbide shafts. The flow sensor shall be constructed of Brass for sizes ¾”- 1½” and Epoxy coated cast iron for sizes 2”-10” with aluminum electronics enclosure and gasket cover.
5. Basis of Design is Niagara Model 860 (MTX or WPX depending on size) with digital pulse transmitter module.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.01 CONTROL WIRING
A. Provide conduit and outlet boxes consistent with manufacturer’s requirements.
B. Install remote push-button stations and/or control devices interposed in the control wiring.
C. Provide over-current protection for all control and interlock wiring as specified in NFPA (70.1971) Art. 240-5 (a), Exception #4 and Art. 430-72, Exception.
D. Line voltage and exposed low voltage control wiring shall be run in conduit. Exposed shall be defined to mean visible from within the occupied spaces (including inside equipment rooms).
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-19 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
E. No splices from the field sensors to the DDC field panels will be allowed. If splices are used, they must be at junction boxes and control centers and the controls provider shall provide the Engineer of Record line loss calculations that ensure the ADC converter in the field panels will not be skewed more than .1% of the full input range of the field panel.
F. No two wires of the same color shall be run in one conduit unless wires of the same color are properly tagged at both ends and any splice points. Do not change colors at splice points.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. The control sequences indicated in the specifications herein show the intended sequences of operation of the various control systems and shall be followed completely, deviations are not acceptable. Control sequences are intended to be conceptual and not prescriptive. Non-stipulated support sequence elements shall be considered as a part of the concept sequences and shall be provided as a part of this specification.
B. Each control system shall be complete with all necessary thermostats, valves, relays, switches, accessories, etc., and all interconnections, and so arranged that they will provide the proper automatic sequence of operation between the various control devices as required to maintain the desired temperature, conditions and sequences.
C. All control equipment shall be fully modulating unless otherwise noted, and relays or accessories not specifically mentioned but required for proper operation shall be included.
D. The system shall be installed by competent mechanics and electricians regularly employed by the controls Contractor. Installation by mechanical Contractor is not acceptable.
E. Control and instrument wiring and capillaries are to be secured to building structure—not to ductwork. The exact location of instruments, panelboards, accessories, etc., not definitely located shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.
F. Field verify all temperature, relative humidity, and carbon dioxide sensors. Provide a log of all calibration verifications to the Engineer of Record upon request – to include: date; readings of the field sensor before calibration; readings of the field sensor after calibration; and the instrument(s) used to calibrate the field device (Model and serial number). The controls contractor shall provide reasonable calibration verifications at the request of the Engineer of Record.
G. All automatic controls and accessories shall be located in accessible locations.
H. All non-panel, as well as panel mounted instruments, shall be clearly labeled as to use and system served by means of engraved laminated nameplates.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-20 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
I. Where control instruments or accessories are to be installed on covered casings, ductwork, etc., they shall be mounted on the finished surface of the covering. Care shall be taken that there are no leaks around the stems where they pass through the metal work.
J. All modulating control valves, dampers, etc., shall operate in a slow, gradual manner without any jerking or slamming.
K. All controls shall operate satisfactorily without any cycling or hunting. The manufacturer shall furnish any necessary additional controls, relays or damping devices as required to correct cycling or hunt that occurs in any part of the control system after the system is in operation.
L. Automatic control manufacturer shall provide power to all electric actuators requiring external power source whether they are furnished by him or part of other equipment.
M. Electronic VAV controllers, motors, and sensors shall be provided under this scope of work. The control Contractor shall also include the cost of mounting controllers and motors by the VAV box manufacturer in his price.
N. The Automatic Control Contractor shall furnish all motorized valves and dampers to the Mechanical Contractor for installation.
O. Water and BTU Flow meters shall be installed per the Manufacturer’s requirements. The installation shall not be installed in such a manner as to reduce the Manufacturer’s published accuracy and turndown ratios.
1. Should sensors be installed in line sized pipe, then the pipe shall be provided with reducers/expanders to maintain the Manufacturer’s stated accuracy and turndown performance. The controls provider shall coordinate with the Mechanical provider to ensure this requirement is met.
2. Up and downstream piping installation requirements to meet the Manufacturer’s accuracy and turndown ratios shall be coordinated with the Mechanical provider.
P. Provide pre-configured Reports to document Baseline sequence operations:
1. All lighting sensor points set up by AHU zone of control;
2. Advanced control algorithms – one for each algorithm for each AHU;
3. Integration devices – one for each integrated device (points to be reported shall be coordinated with the Engineer of Record.
Q. Provide Trend point data for all points, real or virtual, at 5 second intervals.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-21 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3.03 CONTROL MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND INSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Controls Validation Support:
There shall be two levels of control system validation support: Static Controls Validation and Dynamic Controls Validation.
The intent of the Static Controls Validation (SCV) is to ensure the field devices are properly installed; signals being read by the DDC system; sensed values are being reported at both the Field Panel and Enterprise level; and the reported values are properly calibrated. The SCV shall be completed prior to Substantial Completion of the project.
The intent of the Dynamic Controls Validation (DCV) is to ensure the equipment is being properly sequenced and a friendly Human Machine Interface (HMI) is being provided. The DCV shall continue throughout the Warranty period.
B. On-site Training:
On-site training shall be provided for up to 7 of the Owner's representatives (6 staff members and the Engineer of Record). On-site training shall not begin until the SCV has been completed, the graphic screens are operational, and the HMI deemed acceptable to the Engineer of Record.
This training shall be completed in groups of no more than 4 persons per group at one time in one 4-hour session for each group. The training shall focus on the specific installation and shall address both hardware and software. This training shall be completed after local training and after substantial completion. Specific as- built documentation for this project shall be used for reference as a part of this training. Pre-submit course outline to Engineer as stated above.
C. For all levels of training, a sign-off sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer certifying that each individual has completed such training to acceptance of individual. Hours of instruction received shall be a part of the sign- off sheet.
D. It shall be the Owner's responsibility to provide adequate time for attendance at all training sessions.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. General: Provide field testing and adjustment of the complete EMCS and on-site, operational acceptance test of the complete operational EMCS. The Owner may witness all tests.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-22 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Field Test: When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify field module communication before the system is placed on line. All testing, calibration, adjusting, and final field tests shall be completed by the Controls Manufacturer. Provide a cross check of each control point within the BAS. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon BAS communications failure or loss of power. Verify that all systems return to BAS control automatically upon resumption of BAS operation or return of power.
C. The punchlist items shall be corrected by the Installer to the satisfaction of the Engineer within a two (2) week period.
3.05 ACCEPTANCE AND WARRANTY
A. When the system performance is deemed satisfactory and all record (as-built) drawings have been received by the Owner, that part of the system shall be accepted for beneficial use and shall be considered complete.
B. All control hardware, software, and firmware delivered to the Installer by the Controls Manufacturer shall be warranted by the Controls Manufacturer throughout the Warranty Period. Defects arising during this warranty period shall be corrected without cost to the Owner.
PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
2.01 REFER TO THE DRAWINGS FOR SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
*** END OF SECTION ***
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-23 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
*** END OF SECTION ***
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC (BAS) 15975-24 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY STATEMENT
A. Test and balance of HVAC systems supply, return, and exhaust systems shall be performed by an independent test and balance agency certified by AABC or NEBB. The cost of the TAB services are a part of the base bid for this Contract. The TAB services provided herein shall be completed and the written report submitted to the Engineer a minimum of 15 days prior to Substantial Completion of each project phase. The Owner will then perform a verification TAB. If discrepancies are found, they will be corrected by this Contractor and the Contractor will be responsible to pay for additional trips for the Owner's TAB representatives to verify.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements set forth in the Bidding Requirements and the Contractual Conditions of Division One shall apply to this Section.
B. The requirements of Section 15010, Basic Mechanical Requirements, shall be adhered to in the test and balance work which shall include Section 15260, Piping Insulation; Section 15515, Hydronic Specialties; Section 15890, Ductwork; and Section 15975, Building Management and Automatic Temperature Control System.
1.03 GENERAL
A. Scope
1. Description
a. The Contractor shall, at the Contractor's expense, procure the services of an independent testing and balance firm which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems. This specialty services firm shall balance, adjust and test water circulation, air moving equipment, air distribution and/or exhaust systems as herein specified.
b. Test and balance work shall not begin until all systems have been completed and are in full working order to the satisfaction of the Project Architect/Engineer and the Owner. This Contractor shall make all preliminary tests and adjustments before advising in writing that test and balance work is ready to begin and shall place all systems and equipment into full operation during each working day of testing and balancing.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2. Replacement pulleys (adjustable and non-adjustable), additional balancing dampers, pressure taps, balancing valves, cocks and fittings, etc., required to effect proper air and water balance shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. This Contractor shall do this work as soon as possible so as not to delay the completion of the test and balance work.
3. Systems shall be placed into service using approved start up procedures. This (mechanical) contractor shall be responsible for proper initial setting and adjustment of HVAC equipment, air handlers, VAV boxes, exhaust fans, etc. furnished and installed by him.
4. This Contractor shall provide test openings as required; shall operate HVAC equipment and provide trades persons to assist and make adjustments for test and balance during the process.
5. The Contractor's test and balance firm shall periodically visit the site during construction of the HVAC system. No less than two visits per phase will be made. Should methods, materials or workmanship being used adversely affect balancing and adjusting work, the test and balance agency shall report its findings in writing to the Contractor with recommendations for correction.
6. The Contractor's test and balance firm has agreed or shall agree to carry out the test and balance in accordance with the AABC National Standards for Total Systems Balance, 1982 or the NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing or Environmental Systems, Fourth edition, and in conformance with ASHRAE Handbook, 1991, Chapter 34, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing and as outlined in this Specification Section.
7. This Contractor shall furnish to the testing and balancing agency a complete set of plans and specifications, addenda, shop drawings, schedules and change orders as may be required.
B. Quality Assurance
1. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated within six months of testing and balancing and shall be maintained in good working order.
2. In the event of dispute, the Owner or Contractor or Project Architect/Engineer may choose to provide verification of test and balance reports, and such verification shall be by a second independent agency selected by the Engineer. Reports found to be inaccurate will be disallowed, and the Contractor's test and balance firm will be required to repeat operations under the supervision of the second independent agency until accurate reports are completed and agreed upon, provided the Contractor's TAB firm is found to be at fault in the judgment of the Engineer. The cost of disputed test and balance work shall be borne by the Owner or Contractor (whichever is found to be at fault).
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Submittals
1. The test and balance firm will submit two (2) copies of data for the testing and balancing for the approval of the Project Architect/Engineer and three (3) file copies to the Owner and two (2) copies to this Contractor.
2. All data and information shall be compiled in a neat, orderly format on 8-1/2" x 11" test forms and shall be signed and sealed by the certified individual as previously described.
2.01 EXECUTION
A. Water Balance
1. This Contractor shall prepare the new and existing water systems for balancing and verify same to test and balance agency in the following manner:
a. Open all valves to full open position. Close all by-pass valves. Set modulating valve to full coil flow.
b. Check all strainers and, if required, clean same.
c. Examine water in system and determine if water has been treated and cleaned. If water appears dirty, test and balance work shall stop and this Contractor shall reclean system as specified in the Project Specifications.
d. Check expansion tanks to determine if they are not air bound and if the system is completely full of water.
e. Check all air vents at high points of water system and determine if all are installed and operating freely. Make sure all air is removed from the system.
f. Set all temperature controls so all coils are calling for full cooling, and determine that this closes all automatic by-pass valves at coils.
g. Check operation of automatic by-pass valves.
h. Check and set operating temperatures of chillers and heat exchangers to design requirements.
i. Complete air balance work must have been accomplished and all work adjusted and corrected before actual water balance is complete.
2. The test and balance firm shall perform the following:
a. Check and record water temperatures at inlet side of coils.
b. Proceed to balance each water coil.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
c. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coils, mark all settings and record data.
d. Install pressure gages on coils, read pressure drop through coil at set flow rate on-call for full cooling.
e. Record settings and readings on all gauges as found when testing began, and as left when testing is complete.
f. Record and check the following items at each cooling element:
1. "Inlet water" temperature.
2. "Leaving water" temperatures.
3. Pressure drop of each coil.
B. Equipment
1. The test and balance agency shall submit, as part of its report, complete identification and operating data on the following:
a. Cooling towers.
b. CHW pumps.
c. Condenser water pumps.
d. Chillers.
2. Pump Impeller Size Requirements
a. Test and balance agency shall measure pump characteristics and select the pump impeller diameter required to achieve the design flow conditions of the particular system while optimizing the motor work and balancing valve position in order to alleviate noise caused by turbulence in the valve. Turn these dimensions, along with the installed pump curves with the new pump and system curves, for review by the Engineer. Upon approval by the Engineer, the impeller dimensions shall be turned over to the installing contractor for impeller shaving.
C. Certification
1. The test and balance report to the Project Architect/Engineer and to the Owner shall be signed, "sealed" and certified by a certified balancing agent in the State of Florida whose specialty discipline is HVAC, together with a signed statement that this balancer's specialty is HVAC.
*** END OF SECTION ***
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15000-AP
NOTES TO BIDDERS
(ADVANCED PURCHASE EQUIPMENT)
PART 1 GENERAL
1. The Bid Documents for this Advanced Purchase equipment consist of:
a. Purchasing RFP.
b. Specification Section 15000-AP (Notes to Bidders).
c. Specification Section 15684-AP (Centrifugal Water Chiller).
d. Bid Form.
2. The equipment to be purchased based on this specification shall be purchased and paid for by the Owner (State College of Florida, SCF). It is the intent that the purchased equipment shall be turned over to a certified General Contractor and/or Mechanical Contractor for installation (the Installing Contractor). The Installing Contractor shall be required to coordinate and cooperate with the equipment Manufacturer in and as if the Installing Contractor had purchased the equipment directly from the Manufacturer.
3. The award will be made in the best interest of SCF considering: Life Cycle Cost Analysis; final projected construction cost including existing conditions that must be modified to bring the offering to operating status; and other non-technical factors (such as delivery time; completeness of submittal; etc.).
4. Each bid shall be considered a stand-alone offering. It shall not be dependent on the acceptance of other equipment. It shall be at the Owner’s discretion to select the chillers and cooling towers from any manufacturer or combination of manufacturers in the best interest of the Owner.
5. Bidders may make more than one offering at the Bidders discretion…provide all requested information for each offering in a stand alone bound package.
NOTES TO BIDDERS (ADVANCED PURCHASE EQUIPMENT) 15000-AP-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
6. Bid Alternates are requested. If there is no response to a Bid Alternate item it shall be at the sole discretion of the Owner/Engineer to include a value for the non-response item OR to not consider a particular offering. A response to each Bid Alternate is highly recommended.
7. For each offering provide the following in a stand-alone, bound package:
a. For each offering or voluntary alternate, provide a separately completed Bid Form and Bid Alternate Form. Each offering shall be stand-alone and bound into a single package for consideration (Acceptable Formats: 3-ring binders; ring binders; punched and bound binders—NO Loose papers or untabbed sections). Bid Forms shall be signed by an authorized agent of the manufacturer.
b. Each offering shall contain a cover sheet and an index. Provide tabs for each of the following:
(1) Tab 1 ...... Bid Form Completed with Authorizing Signature (signature applies to Base Bid and Alternates) and Bid Alternate Form.
(2) Tab 2 ...... ARI 550/590 Certified Part Load Runs at 10% Increments and Various Condenser Water Temperatures.
(3) Tab 3 ...... Certified Part Load Runs at Engineer specified 10% Increments and Condenser Water Temperatures.
(4) Tab 4 ...... Chiller Literature Clearly Showing Proposed Model and requested literature (see specifications).
(5) Tab 5 ...... Additional Information (as needed or as voluntarily offered).
8. Payment Schedule for Awarded Offering:
10% upon approval of Shop Drawings
80% upon successful Off-Loading of equipment
10% upon receipt of start-up report from Manufacturer
9. This purchase is exempt from Florida Sales Tax.
10. All Bid Alternate Annual Service Agreements are annually renewable at the sole discretion of the Owner.
11. Factory Performance Testing is a requirement of the Base Bid. Refer to Specifications for details.
*** END OF SECTION ***
NOTES TO BIDDERS (ADVANCED PURCHASE EQUIPMENT) 15000-AP-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 15684-AP
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER
(ADVANCED PURCHASE)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Packaged Water Cooled Liquid Chiller.
B. Charge of Refrigerant and Oil.
C. Controls and Control Connections.
D. Chilled Water Connections.
E. Starters.
F. Electrical Power Connections.
G. Ancillary Chiller Support Equipment.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15170 ...... Motors.
B. Section 15242 ...... Vibration Isolation.
C. Section 15510 ...... Hydronic Piping.
D. Section 15540 ...... HVAC Pumps.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ARI 550/590-2003—Standard for Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle.
B. ANSI/ASHRAE 15—Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
C. ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2004—Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Buildings.
D. ANSI/ASME SEC 8—Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.04 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS (PRIOR TO FINAL FACTORY ORDERING)—SELECTED OFFERING
A. Submit three (3) sets of shop drawings to Engineer.
B. Submit mechanical shop drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and floor loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate valves, strainers, refrigerant relief connections, and thermostatic valves required for complete system.
C. Submit electrical shop drawings indicating all external field connections, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements, and wiring diagrams. Clearly indicate amperage in-rush currents, feeder sizes and connections. Identify circuit breaker feeder sizes needed to meet chiller requirements.
D. Clearly identify any items to be installed by others in a separate letter along with the submittal.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
F. After the Installing Contractor has been selected, provide an additional three (3) sets of the Approved Shop Drawings to the Installing Contractor.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA (WITHIN 4 WEEKS AFTER SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL APPROVAL)
A. Submit operations data.
B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories. Include troubleshooting guide.
C. Submit maintenance data.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ARI 550/590-2003 codes for construction, testing, and rating of centrifugal water chillers, unless otherwise stated herein.
B. Provide UL label for electrical components.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site (FOB to the jobsite). The Manufacturer's Technicians are to assemble the components that are shipped loose except those listed on the submittal to be installed by others.
B. Manufacturer shall provide weather protection for the delivered equipment suitable for transportation and outside storage in a tropical environment.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. The Manufacturer shall be responsible to be on-site during off-loading and supervise the process. Provide the Installing Contractor with 72 hours notice of equipment arrival at the job site. Coordinate rigging and scheduling requirements with the Contractor prior to delivery. The Installing Contractor shall provide rigging and unloading of the chiller(s) under the supervision of the Manufacturer.
D. The Installing Contractor shall protect units on site from physical damage after the equipment is unloaded. The equipment manufacturer shall immediately notify the Owner/Engineer of any apparent construction damage to the equipment identified during start-up process.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer shall meet with the Installing Contractor to coordinate specific installation requirements. Also, the Manufacturer shall visit the site no less than two (2) times during installation to identify any issues of the Manufacturer. A copy of each site visit report shall be sent to the Project Engineer and Owner’s Representative.
B. The Manufacturer shall provide a complete checkout of the finished installation and all required pre-startup inspections and service. The initial startup of equipment shall be done under supervision of the Manufacturer. The Manufacturer shall issue a statement to the Project Engineer certifying the pre-startup inspections were completed and the equipment was installed properly per Manufacturer’s instructions or identify any observed deficiencies (“statement of pre-startup inspections”).
C. Manufacturer shall provide complete 10 year, Full Machine Parts and Labor Warranty; to include: Maintenance and Service Agreements, Supplies and Replacement Fluids.
D. START OF WARRANTY PERIOD: The Manufacturer shall submit a complete package copy of the record documents related to the chiller up to the day the Manufacturer submits the pre-startup inspection report; to include, but not limited to: factory test data; unloading supervision report; site visit reports during the installation; and the pre-startup inspection report. The one (1) year warranty shall begin on the day the Engineer of Record receives and approves, by dated signature, the record document package. Should the Manufacturer fail to submit the record document package, the one (1) year unconditional warranty shall begin on the same date the Installing Contractor Substantial Completion for the installation portion of the project occurs.
1.09 CERTIFIED PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Provide factory certified ARI testing. The factory certified test shall be part of the base bid. Provide five (5) original copies of final test results to Engineer.
B. Part load testing shall be performed in accordance to procedures as specified in ARI- 550/590-2003.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. APPROVED TO BID:
1. Trane.
2. OTHER SUBSTITUTES—Submit a written substitution request, prior to bid, to the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 15010. Accepted substitutes will be notified via Addendum.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNIT
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested water cooled liquid chillers consisting of centrifugal compressor, starter condenser, evaporator, thermal expansion valve or orifice, refrigeration accessories, control panel, condenser barrel and evaporator barrel, marine water box, and vibration isolators. Vibration isolators shall be neoprene pads if chiller is located on ground level slab or manufacturer approved spring isolators if not.
1. For chillers with dual compressors, provide each compressor with a dedicated motor and motor controller, and provide for continued operation when either compressor-drive assembly fails or is being serviced.
B. The chillers design shall be capable of operating at 25% full load with 85 F entering condenser water temperature without surge or other harmful effects or erratic operation. The chiller manufacturer shall include this test point in the factory performance test. If a variable speed drive is required to accomplish this requirement it must be provided. Hot gas bypass is NOT acceptable.
2.03 COMPRESSOR-DRIVE ASSEMBLY
A. Description: Single-stage or multistage, variable-displacement, centrifugal-type compressor driven by an electric motor.
B. Compressor:
1. Casing: Cast iron, precision ground.
2. Impeller: High-strength cast aluminum or cast-aluminum alloy on carbon- or alloy-steel shaft.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Drive: Provide hermetic drive design using an electric motor as the driver.
1. Gear Drives: For chillers with gear drives, provide single- or double-helical gear design continuously coated with oil while chiller is operating. Gears shall comply with American Gear Manufacturer Association standards. Gear driven machines shall be integrally assembled in the compressor rotor support and individually mounted in its own journal and thrust bearings. Non-rotor supported gears are acceptable but must be visible via inspection plate. Manufacturers with speed increasing transmissions (gear drives) shall provide an annual inspection of the gears and all bearings. A written report shall be forwarded to the owner each year over the first ten (10) years to confirm completion of inspection. The manufacturer must also include a (10) year parts and labor warranty for shaft seal replacements.
2. Drive Coupling: For chillers with open drives, provide flexible disc with all- metal construction and no wearing parts to ensure long life without the need for lubrication.
3. Seals: Seal drive assembly to prevent refrigerant leakage.
D. Compressor Motor:
1. Continuous-duty, squirrel-cage, induction-type, two-pole motor with energy efficiency required to suit chiller energy efficiency indicated.
2. Factory mounted, aligned, and balanced as part of compressor assembly before shipping.
3. Motor shall be of sufficient capacity to drive compressor throughout entire operating range without overload and with sufficient capacity to start and accelerate compressor without damage.
4. For chillers with open drives, provide motor with open-dripproof enclosure.
5. Provide motor with thermistor or RTD to monitor bearing temperature and report information to chiller control panel.
6. Motor transmission and compressor will be hermetically sealed into a common assembly and arranged for easy servicing. Compressor motor shall be equipped with over temperature sensors/safeties.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
7. The motor shall be hermetic and either suction or liquid refrigerant cooled. Hot gas motor cooling is not acceptable. If an open motor design is used, then the manufacturer shall pay to provide and install a chilled water AHU in the chiller plant to offset the motor heat introduced into the space (AHU capacity is approximately 0.018 tons per chiller tons). This unit must be completely operational and include all wiring and controls. The manufacturer would also be responsible for covering any and all engineering costs (mechanical and electrical) associated with the redesign of the chiller plant to accommodate the additional AHU, chiller capacity and controls. In addition, the scheduled chiller tonnage shall be increased by the capacity of the additional AHU. The combined kW of the additional AHU and chiller provided shall not exceed the scheduled kW or be subject to both demand and use penalties. Open drive chiller manufacturers shall list, on the submittal, additional maintenance requirements due to coupling alignment, refrigerant seal, coupling and bearings.
E. Vibration Balance: Balance chiller compressor and drive assembly to provide a precision balance that is free of noticeable vibration over the entire operating range.
1. Overspeed Test: 25 percent above design operating speed.
F. Service: Easily accessible for inspection and service.
1. Compressor's internal components shall be accessible without having to remove compressor-drive assembly from chiller.
2. Transmission gears will be of double helical type and be arranged for visual inspection without disassembly or removal of compressor casing or impeller.
3. Provide lifting lugs or eyebolts attached to casing.
G. Capacity Control: Maintain stable operation that is free of surge, cavitation, and vibration throughout range of operation. Configure to achieve most energy-efficient operation possible.
H. Oil Lubrication System: Consisting of pump, filtration, cooler, factory-wired power connection, and controls.
1. Provide lubrication to bearings, gears, and other rotating surfaces at all operating, startup, coastdown, and standby conditions including power failure.
2. Thermostatically controlled oil heater properly sized to remove refrigerant from oil.
3. Oil filter shall be the easily replaceable cartridge type with means of positive isolation while servicing.
4. Oil pump starter will be factory supplied and mounted on the chiller and factory wired with only field power leads required.
5. Hermetic motor driven oil pump
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
6. Factory-installed and pressure-tested piping with isolation valves and accessories.
7. Oil compatible with refrigerant and chiller components.
8. Positive visual indication of oil level.
9. Reservoir oil temperature gage.
2.04 REFRIGERATION
A. Refrigerant:
1. Compatibility: Chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.
2. Chiller shall only utilize refrigerants as outlined in ASHRAE Standard 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems.
B. Refrigerant Flow Control: Manufacturer's standard refrigerant flow-control device satisfying performance requirements indicated.
C. Pressure Relief Device:
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and in applicable portions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
D. Refrigeration Transfer: Provide service valves and other factory-installed accessories required to facilitate transfer of refrigerant from chiller to a remote refrigerant storage and recycling system. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 147.
E. Purge System:
1. For chillers operating at subatmospheric pressures (using R-123 refrigerant), factory install an automatic purge system for collection and return of refrigerant and lubricating oil and for removal of noncondensables including, but not limited to, water, water vapor, and noncondensable gases.
2. System shall be a thermal purge design, refrigerant or air cooled, equipped with a carbon filter that includes an automatic regeneration cycle.
3. Factory wire to chiller's main power supply and system complete with controls, piping, and refrigerant valves to isolate the purge system from the chiller.
4. Construct components of noncorrodible materials.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
5. Controls shall interface with chiller control panel to indicate modes of operation, set points, data reports, diagnostics, and alarms.
6. Efficiency of not more than 0.02 lb of refrigerant per pound of air when rated according to ARI 580.
7. Operation independent of chiller per ASHRAE 147.
F. Positive-Pressure System:
1. For chillers operating at subatmospheric pressures (using R-123 refrigerant), factory install an automatic positive-pressure system.
2. During nonoperational periods, positive-pressure system shall automatically maintain a positive pressure for atmosphere in the refrigerant pressure vessel of not less than 0.5 psig (adjustable) up to a pressure that remains within the vessel design pressure limits.
3. System shall be factory wired and include controller, electric heat, pressure transmitter, or switch.
2.05 EVAPORATOR
A. Description: Shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within shell with a distributor trough and a perforated distributor plate, located under the entire tube bundle. Shell is separate from condenser.
B. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with fusion welded seams.
C. Designed to prevent liquid refrigerant carryover from entering compressor.
D. Provide evaporator with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of liquid-refrigerant level.
E. Tubes:
1. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets and other tubes.
2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube sheets.
3. Material: Copper.
4. Minimum Wall Thickness: 0.028 inch.
5. External Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Internal Finish: Enhanced.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
F. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to accommodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in shell. End tube sheets shall be epoxy coated.
G. Water Box:
1. Carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and cleaning of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell.
2. Standard type for water box.
3. Provide water boxes with lifting lugs or eyebolts.
4. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Flanged.
5. Water box shall be epoxy coated.
2.06 CONDENSER
A. Description: Horizontal shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within shell and gas baffle. Shell is separate from evaporator.
B. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with fusion welded seams.
C. Designed to prevent direct impingement of high-velocity hot gas from compressor discharge on tubes.
D. Provide condenser with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of refrigerant charge and condition.
E. Tubes:
1. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets and other tubes.
2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube sheets.
3. Material: Copper
4. Minimum Wall Thickness: 0.028 inch.
5. External Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Internal Finish: Enhanced.
F. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to accommodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in shell. End tube sheets shall be epoxy coated.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-9 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
G. Water Box:
1. Carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and cleaning of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell.
2. Marine type for water box with piping connections.
3. Provide water boxes and marine water-box covers with lifting lugs or eyebolts.
4. Davited marine water-box covers.
5. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Flanged.
6. Fit each water box with 3/4-inch drain connection at low point and vent connection at high point, each with valve and threaded plug.
7. Integral steel water baffles shall be located and welded within the water box to provide required pass arrangements.
8. Design working pressure shall be 150 psig and the boxes tested at 225 psig.
9. Water box shall be epoxy coated.
2.07 INSULATION
A. Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Manufacturer: Armaflex or equivalent (25/50) foam insulation
B. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Factory-applied insulation over all cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming condensation. Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator shell and end tube sheets, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping. Insulation of the evaporator water boxes including nozzles shall be field applied by the Contractor and shall be removable.
1. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface.
2. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and paint as indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel surfaces.
3. Seal seams and joints to provide a vapor barrier.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-10 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
4. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match other painted parts.
2.08 ELECTRICAL
A. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.
B. Motor Starter:
1. Provide a NEMA-1 enclosed Wye-Delta closed transition starter conforming to NEMA motor standards. The starter shall be suitable for control and running over current protection of chiller motor. The starter shall be for a soft start with air break contactors capable of carrying the specified current on a continuous and locked rotor basis without damage. Starter shall contain overload protection on each leg of the three phase voltage.
2. The starter shall be mounted on the chiller, complete wiring between the chiller and the starter shall be the responsibility and expense of the Manufacturer. Provide enclosure with a door lock and keys. A 3-phase analog ammeter with position switch, 3-phase analog voltmeter with position switch, and control transformer shall be factory mounted, wired, and tested.
3. Provide two (2) sets of auxiliary contacts either in the starter or in the electric control panel for feedback of starter being engaged. Overload relays shall be inverse time - magnetic type or solid state on each phase and to be manually reset. Control transformer and circuit shall be 120 volts with fused primary and secondary and disconnected with the main disconnect switch.
4. The Manufacturers shall provide a lockable service disconnect.
5. The chiller motor starter shall have a short circuit withstand rating (SCWR) of greater than or equal of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes. This rating shall be marked on the motor starter enclosure in accordance with UL 508 or some accredited third party agency. If the starter does not meet this SCWR, the chiller manufacturer shall be responsible for all costs to coordinate and install the integration of an upstream device to limit the available fault current to less than the manufacturer's starter's SCWR as certified by UL 508.
6. The manufacturer shall provide a hi-interrupting circuit breaker with 65,000 amperes or greater interrupt (AIC) rating.
7. No aluminum wiring accepted.
8. Submittals shall clearly show the starting load amps and the duration of such amp draw. Provide all data necessary for the Engineer to mate the chiller with an emergency generator in the event the chiller is put on an emergency generator in the future
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-11 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Single-point, field-power connection to circuit breaker. Minimum withstand rating shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 65,000 A.
1. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.
D. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram. Spare wiring terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment.
E. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with adjustable undervoltage setting and isolated output contacts for hardwired connection.
F. Power Protection: Chiller shall shut down within six cycles of power interruption.
2.09 CONTROLS
A. Control: Standalone and microprocessor based, with all memory stored in nonvolatile memory so that reprogramming is not required on loss of electrical power.
B. Controls shall be electronic microprocessor and fully automatic.
C. Control system will provide shut-down for the following:
1. Motor overcurrent.
2. Over/Under voltage.
3. Bearing high temperature.
4. Low refrigerant temperature.
5. High condenser pressure.
6. High motor temperature.
7. High compressor discharge pressure.
8. Low oil pressure.
D. Controls will provide an override condition that automatically reduces the load on the chiller in the event of high motor temperature and low refrigerant temperature which causes a pre-alarm condition. If condition persists, controls will shut-down machine.
E. Controls will provide freeze protection when machine experiences low load.
F. Control of machine capacity will be by means of variable inlet guide vanes located in compressor section.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-12 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
G. General: The control center shall be factory mounted, wired, and tested. The control center shall automatically control the operation of the unit. The control center shall be fused through an adequately sized transformer and shall include a duplex receptacle for service.
It is the intent of this specification that the control center be unit mounted. If the control center is to be mounted otherwise, all associated wiring and installation costs shall be the responsibility of the Manufacturer.
H. Display Panel: The control center shall include a multiple character alphanumeric display, individual light indicators and dial type gauges as required in this specification.
Dial type gauges shall include: evaporator refrigerant pressure, condenser refrigerant pressure, low oil pressure (sump side of oil pump), and high oil pressure (supply side of oil pump). All gauges shall be a minimum of three inches (3") in diameter and scaled in engineering units. Gauges may be provided in lieu of analog sensed alphanumeric display data required.
Alphanumeric display data shall include: entering evaporator water temperature, leaving evaporator water temperature, entering condenser water temperature, leaving condenser water temperature, chiller or compressor motor amps, number of compressor starts counter, run time counter (hours of operation), date, and time of day. "Code" type alphanumeric display indexing is acceptable provided there is a permanently mounted index table to and readily accessible to the display panel.
Setpoint adjustments must be provided for: leaving chilled water temperature, operating demand limit, and pulldown demand limit.
Safety logic and fault messages shall be displayed in order to provide a means for troubleshooting problems. The control center shall display information for reason of shutdown complete with time and date of occurrence.
Mode of operation (local/remote), current operating status (loading/unloading) and operating mode (manual/auto) shall be displayable and alterable from the control center.
I. Sensors: Temperature sensors shall be 100 OHM Platinum, RTD types (except motor winding sensors which shall be RTD or thermistor type). All sensors shall be factory calibrated, tested, and operational at the time of factory testing. All sensor operation shall be field verified during the field start-up.
The Manufacturer shall provide a water flow switch (differential pressure type) for mounting by others if not installed on the unit.
J. Safety Logic and Controls: The control center shall contain proper safety and logic controls as per the manufacturers recommendations. Minimum logic shutdown conditions shall include: high condenser temperature, low oil pressure, high oil pressure, high compressor discharge temperature, low evaporator pressure and motor fault.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-13 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
K. Chilled Water Reset: The control center shall be capable of operating via a remote chilled water supply temperature setpoint. Operating mode (remote/local) shall be operator selectable and current setpoint, either locally or remotely set, shall be displayable. The control center shall be capable of accepting a remote 4-20 mA remote setpoint signal when in remote mode.
The Manufacturer shall provide a means for remote start/stop operation via contact closure from a remote source.
A set of normally open dry contacts shall be provided as feedback verification from the control center of chiller in running mode.
L. Loss of Program Protection: The control center program and operator entered parameters shall be backed up by battery in case of power loss. EEPROM storage or other pre-approved means of insuring program integrity is acceptable.
M. Flow switches shall be vapor-proof, suitable for 150 psig DWP cooler and condenser water circuits. The switch shall be rated for 115V-1 PH-60/50 Hz service provided by chiller manufacturer and on both circuits. Flow switches shall be differential pressure type, no paddle types will be accepted.
N. Operator Interface: Multiple-character digital or graphic display with dynamic update of information and with keypad or touch-sensitive display located on front of control enclosure. In either imperial or metric units selectable through the interface, display the following information:
O. Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to five parameters simultaneously over an adjustable period and frequency of polling.
P. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.
Q. Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local automatic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source.
R. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of connecting a printer and a notebook computer.
S. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, and display chiller status and alarms.
1. ASHRAE 135, BACnet communication interface with the BAS shall enable the BAS operator to remotely control and monitor the chiller from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at chiller control panel shall be available through the BAS.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-14 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Flow Switches:
1. Chiller manufacturer shall furnish a switch for each evaporator and verify field-mounting location before installation.
2. Pressure Differential Switches:
a. Construction: Wetted parts of body and trim constructed of Type 316 stainless steel.
b. Performance: Switch shall withstand, without damage, the full- pressure rating of the heat exchanger applied to either port and exhibit zero set-point shift due to variation in working pressure.
c. Set Point: Screw type, field adjustable.
d. Electrical Connections: Internally mounted screw-type terminal blocks.
e. Switch Action: Double-pole, double-throw switch with one pole field wired to the chiller control panel and the other pole field wired to the BAS.
B. Vibration Isolation:
1. Chiller manufacturer shall furnish vibration isolation for each chiller.
2. Neoprene Pad (Hermetic Chillers):
a. Two layers of 0.375-inch thick, ribbed- or waffle-pattern neoprene pads separated by a 16-gage, stainless-steel plate.
b. Fabricate pads from 40- to 50-durometer neoprene.
c. Provide stainless-steel square bearing plate to load the pad uniformly between 20 and 40 psig with a 0.12- to 0.16-inch deflection.
3. Inertia Base: (Open Drive Chillers)
a. Chiller vibration isolation and the base type (i.e. floor pad) will be in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook, 2007, HVAC Applications, Chapter 47 Table 48. Open drive centrifugal chillers shall require installation onto a base type "C" inertia base as defined by ASHRAE. This concrete base type "C" shall consist of a steel pouring form with welded-in reinforcing bars, provision for equipment hold-down, and isolator brackets. Hermetic centrifugal chillers require installation onto a base type "A" neoprene pads as defined by ASHRAE.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-15 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Variable Flow Rate Change Capabilities
1. All chillers applied in variable evaporator flow (VPF) system shall be able to withstand a chilled water flow rate-of-change of twenty five percent (25%) per minute while maintaining plus or minus two (+/- 2 F) of design supply chilled water temperature, and fifty percent (50%) per minute at any load above the compressor minimum without cycling "off" on low load (low leaving water temperature) or evaporator refrigerant temperature limit. If these tolerances can not be maintained the chiller manufacturer is responsible for costs associated with designing and implementing a controls system to accomplish the requirements.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform functional run tests of chillers before shipping.
B. Factory performance test chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590.
1. Test the following conditions:
a. The chillers design shall be capable of operating at 25% full load with 85 F entering condenser water temperature without surge or other harmful effects or erratic operation. If a variable speed drive is required to accomplish this requirement it must be provided. Hot gas bypass is NOT acceptable.
2. Prepare test report indicating test procedures, instrumentation, test conditions, and results. Submit copy of results within one week of test date.
C. For chillers located indoors, sound pressure level shall not exceed 84 dBA. If this level is exceeded, the manufacturer shall provide factory or field sound attenuation necessary to meet the specified sound pressure level requirement. Submittal data shall include certified sound pressure levels..
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION (RECEIVING, UNLOADING, AND INSTALLING READY FOR OPERATION AND TESTING)
A. Coordinate installation requirements with the Installing Contractor in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide off-loading supervision.
C. Provide a minimum of two (2) installation inspection reports during construction.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-16 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
D. Provide a Pre-Startup Inspection Report identifying any deficiencies. Provide the report whether or not deficiencies exist. The report shall state acceptance with the following verbiage “The equipment was inspected (mechanically and electrically) and found to have been installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.”
3.02 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide off-loading field supervision to the Installing Contractor.
B. Assemble components shipped separately, charge oil, and refrigerant.
C. Prepare, test, and start systems.
D. Supply service of factory trained representative to perform testing, dehydration and charging of machine, start-up, and instruction on operation and maintenance to Owner.
E. Supply refrigerant and oil, and perform application with factory trained Technicians.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide systems demonstration.
B. Demonstrate system operation.
3.04 TRAINING
A. Supplier shall provide as a part of the base bid, maintenance and operation training of specified equipment, for two (2) personnel selected by the Owner. Training shall be a minimum of two sessions at four (4) hours each at the site. The Manufacturer is to submit documents certifying such training has been received by the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Owner. These documents are to be signed by the Owner's Representative receiving such training and shall be submitted by the Owner and copied to the Contractor prior to receipt of final payment.
*** END OF SECTION ***
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-17 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER (ADVANCED PURCHASE) 15684-AP-18 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
ELECTRICAL INDEX
16010...... BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16060...... ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
16111...... CONDUIT
16120...... BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
16130...... BOXES
16141...... WIRING DEVICES
16160...... CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
16170...... GROUNDING AND BONDING
16190...... SUPPORTING DEVICES
16195...... ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16425...... SWITCHBOARDS
16440...... DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16450...... SECONDARY GROUNDING
16480...... MOTOR CONTROL
16485...... CONTACTORS
16600...... SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS)
© ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
© ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections, in addition to Division 1—General Requirements.
1.02 INTENT
A. It is the intention of these specifications and drawings to call for finished work, tested, and ready for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is used, it shall mean "furnish and install complete and ready for use."
B. Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper installation and operation, shall be included in the work, the same as if herein specified or shown.
1.03 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site and check the correctness of same as related to the work. All material take-offs for the site shall be field measured prior to bids.
1.04 DRAWINGS
A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the contract. Drawings are not to be scaled. The architectural drawings and details shall be examined for exact location of fixtures and equipment. Where they are not definitely located, this information shall be obtained from the Architect.
B. If directed by the Architect or Engineer, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work.
C. At the time of each shop drawing submission, the Contractor shall call the Engineer's attention (in writing) to, and plainly mark on shop drawings, any deviations from the Contract Documents.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
D. Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogs, submitted for approval, shall be properly labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used, location, section and article number of specifications governing, Contractor's name, and name of job. All equipment shall be labeled to match labeling on contract documents.
E. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which approval is being requested, shall be specific and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc. of item submitted shall be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted.
F. Approval rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are approved, said approval does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the contract drawings and specifications.
G. All shop drawings shall be submitted to the A/E by Contractor no later than 30 days from the day of contract award.
H. Failure of the Contractor to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle him to an extension of contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.
I. Submit all Division 16 submittals at one (1) time in one (1) integral group. Piece-by- piece submission of individual items will not be acceptable. Engineer may check contents of each submittal set upon initial delivery; if not complete as set forth herein, submittal sets may be returned to Contractor without review and approval and will not be accepted until made complete.
J. At the close of the job, prior to final review, five (5) bound copies of the following shall be submitted by transmittal letter to the Engineer for review and acceptance.
1. Equipment warranties
2. Contractor's warranty
3. Parts list and manuals for all equipment
4. Operating Instructions (in writing)
5. Written instructions on maintenance and care of the system
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70—National Electrical Code.
B. State Requirements for Educational Facilities (SREF), Chapter 4, Section 423, of the Florida Building Code.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. NFPA 101—Life Safety Code.
D. Florida Department of Education Accessibility Guidelines and Requirements.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in the following Sections, but not limited to:
1. Section 16141 ...... Wiring Devices.
2. Section 16160 ...... Cabinets and Enclosures.
3. Section 16425 ...... Switchboards.
4. Section 16440 ...... Disconnect Switches.
5. Section 16480 ...... Motor Control.
6. Section 16485 ...... Contactors.
C. It shall be understood that review of shop drawings by the Engineer does not supersede the requirement to provide a complete and functioning system in compliance with the Contract Documents.
1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Materials and equipment are specified herein by a single or by multiple Manufacturers to indicate quality and performance required. The drawings are based upon equipment scheduled on drawings and specified. If another Manufacturer is considered for substitution during the bidding process, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all electrical, mechanical, structural, or architectural changes. Comparable equipment Manufacturers which are listed as equals shall be considered as substitutes. Manufacturers other than the basis of design shall submit a catalog information and 1/4" scale plan and section drawings showing proper fit and all clearances for maintenance items.
B. Substitutions of other Manufacturer's will be considered for use if, in the Engineers opinion, the item requested for substitution is equal to that specified. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a typed comparative list of the basis of design and the proposed substitute.
Request for approval of substitutions or equals prior to bid must be made in writing. The approval of any substitutions or equals prior to bid shall not be construed as a shop drawing approval. The substitute or equal must be submitted as described in the specifications and meet all the requirements of the specifications and drawings.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. All requests for substitutions shall be submitted as described in paragraph 1.07, B., and specifically indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product specified as basis of design and the product proposed for substitution.
D. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the drawing, which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, or any other part of the mechanical or electrical, all such redesign, and all new drawings and detailing required therefore, shall be prepared by the Subcontractor at his own expense and submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval.
E. Where such approved deviation requires quantity and arrangement of equipment from that specified or indicated on the drawings, any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.08 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Give full cooperation to other trades and furnish in writing to the General Contractor, with copies to the Architect, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
B. When work installed under this Division will be in close proximity to, or will interfere with work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If so directed by the Engineer/Architect, prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less than 1/4" = 1'0", clearly showing how work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. If the work is installed before coordinating with other trades, or so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, make all the necessary changes in work to correct the condition without extra charge.
C. Furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans, and shop details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.
1.09 PROTECTION
A. Protect all work and material provided under this Division from damage. All damaged equipment work or material provided under this Division shall be replaced with new. Rebuilts are not acceptable.
B. Protect all work and equipment until inspected, tested, and accepted. Protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which are not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.10 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, AND HOISTING
A. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required.
1.11 REMOVAL OF RUBBISH
A. This Contractor shall at all times keep premises free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish caused by his employees or work. At completion of work he shall remove all his tools, scaffolding, materials, and rubbish from the building and site. He shall leave the premises and his work in a clean, orderly, and acceptable condition.
1.12 SAFETY
A. This Contractor shall comply with Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.333), Title 29—Labor, Chapter XIII, Bureau of Standards, Department of Labor, Part 1518—Safety and Health Regulations for Construction; and that his housekeeping and equipment be maintained in such a manner that they comply with the Florida Industrial Commission Safety Code and Regulations of the Federal Williams—Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), wherein it states that the Contractor shall not require any laborer or mechanic employed in the performance of the contract to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health and safety.
1.13 SUPERVISION
A. This Contractor shall provide a competent, experienced, full time superintendent who is acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner, and who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor.
1.14 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials and apparatus required for the work, except as specifically specified otherwise, shall be new, of first-class quality, and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be so selected and arranged as to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, a first-class standard article as approved by the Engineer shall be furnished. Refer to substitutions in this Section.
B. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the plans or specifications, all equipment and materials shall be installed with the approval of the Architect and Engineer in accordance with the recommendations of the Manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the Manufacturer recommends.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.15 QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION
A. All work shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer and the Owner. In case of moving machinery, sound, or vibration noticeable outside of room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room, will be considered objectionable. Sound or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Engineer and the Owner shall be corrected in an approved manner at no additional expense to the Owner.
1.16 FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS, PIERS, ATTACHMENTS
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary foundations, supports, pads, bases and piers required for all equipment furnished under this Division, and shall submit drawings to the Architect and Engineer for approval before purchase, fabrication or construction of same.
B. For all floor mounted equipment, provide concrete pads which extend six inches (6") beyond equipment base in all directions with top edge chamfered. Inset six inches (6") steel dowel rods into floors to anchor pads. Shop drawings of all foundations and pads shall be submitted to the Architect and Engineer for approval before same are constructed.
C. Construction of foundations, supports, pads, bases, and piers where mounted on the floor, shall be the same materials and same quality of finish as the adjacent and surrounding flooring material.
D. All equipment, unless shown otherwise, shall be securely attached to the building structure in an approved manner. Attachments shall be of a strong and durable nature and any attachments that are, in the opinion of the Architect and the Engineer, not strong enough shall be replaced as directed.
1.17 ACCESS DOORS FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Provide flush panel access doors with a 16 gauge steel frame and a 14 gauge steel door panel.
B. Finish is to be primed painted steel.
C. Provide concealed hinges which allow the door to open 175 degrees and have a removable pin.
D. Provide access doors with a locked flush mounted vandal proof spanner head operated steel cams.
E. Provide 1-1/2 hour "B" label door for rated chase walls.
F. Furnish masonry anchors for installation in masonry walls and metal lath wings with casing bead for plaster installation.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
G. Provide a minimum 2'-0" by 2'-0" access doors unless shown or noted otherwise on the drawings.
H. Access doors for chase walls shall be mounted 16" off the finish floor.
I. Access doors for electrical equipment shall be a minimum of 12" larger than equipment all around.
1.18 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable Codes and Standards as follows: 1. Standard: a. Certain standard materials and installation requirements are described by reference to standard specifications. These standards are as follows:
NEMA ...... National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
UL ...... Underwriters Laboratories.
ANSI ...... American National Standards Institute.
For additional standards and requirements see other sections of the specifications.
Whenever a reference is made to a standard, installation and materials shall comply with the latest published edition at the time project is bid unless otherwise specified herein.
2. Codes and Rules: a. All material furnished and all work installed shall comply with the following codes as they apply to this project:
NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
Regulations of the Florida Industrial Commission Concerning Safety.
Applicable County, State, and Local Building Codes.
Local and State Fire Marshal Rules and Regulations.
Chapter 4A-47, Florida Administrative Code - Uniform Fire Safety Standards for Elevators.
Occupational Safety and Health Agency Standards (OSHA).
Florida State Board of Health Rules and Regulations.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-7 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
Florida Building Code.
State Requirements for Educational Facilities (SREF), Chapter 4, Section 423, of the Florida Building Code. Applicable codes shall be those adopted by the authority having jurisdiction at the time project is bid.
3. Permits, Fees and Inspections
a. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government fees, sales taxes and other costs, including utility connections or extensions, in connection with this work; file all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction.
b. Obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver to the Owner/Engineer the same certificates before request for acceptance and final payment for the work.
c. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings required to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations.
d. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any work or materials which conflict with any of the applicable codes, standards, laws and regulations before submitting his bid.
B. Conform to Florida Department of Education Accessibility Guidelines and Requirements.
1.19 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The scope of the work included under this Division of the Specifications shall include complete electrical systems as shown on the plans and as specified herein. The General Conditions and Special Conditions of these specifications shall form a part and be included under this Section of the Specifications. Provide all supervision, labor, material, equipment, machinery, plant, and any and all other items necessary to complete the electrical systems. All items of equipment are specified in the singular; however, provide and install the number of items of equipment as indicated on the drawings, and as required for complete systems.
B. Systems shall include all appurtenances as required to achieve the operating conditions as shown and specified and shall result in a superior installation.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-8 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Scope of work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Demolition
a. Remove, replace, and/or relocate all electrical devices as shown on the Electrical and Electrical Systems Demolition Drawings. Demolition drawings are based on field observations and record drawings. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer prior to disturbing the existing installation.
b. Maintain all existing to remain systems, circuitry, and/or devices. If any existing to remain systems, circuitry, and/or devices must be removed during demolition, restore them to their original working order.
c. Temporarily store all items to be relocated, if required. Contractor shall be responsible for safe storage of all such items and shall replace any items lost or damaged during storage removal or reinstallation.
d. Demolition of existing electrical equipment, etc., shall be done as indicated on the Drawings. Existing electrical equipment to be removed shall be offered to the Owner. If the Owner wishes to utilize the existing equipment elsewhere, this Contractor shall move the equipment to a site designated by the Owner. All material to be removed shall be discarded by the Contractor and they shall not be used again.
e. All demolition work shall be completely coordinated with the Owner. Demolition and reconnections requiring shut-down of existing systems shall be scheduled with the Owner/Engineer. If shut-down can only be accommodated on the weekend or after normal working hours, such work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. New Work
a. Provide new electrical distribution equipment as shown on the drawings and detailed in the specifications.
b. Provide electrical line voltage power connections for the Energy Management System(s) [EMS]. Coordinate the exact quantity and locations with the Controls Contractor.
D. Any equipment submitted for prior approval shall be submitted with the following written information specifically for the submitted project application: specific model numbers, dimensional data, performance data and other data as requested by the Engineer. General or ambiguous submittals will not be considered for prior approval.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-9 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.20 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any work or materials which conflict with any of the applicable codes, standards, laws and regulations before submitting his bid.
1.21 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1.
1.22 LICENSE
A. The Subcontracting Firm for the electrical and systems installation shall be licensed by the State of Florida and the local authorities, regularly engaged in the installation of electrical systems and other related equipment. The Subcontracting Firm shall be familiar with all local conditions including interpretations, codes and shall have at least 5 years of successful installation experience on similar projects of the same magnitude and scope.
The Subcontracting Firm shall list at least three projects it has successfully completed over the last five years for proof of experience of this caliber. This list shall be included with submittals for review by Architect/Engineer. The Subcontracting Firm shall hold a Florida State Certified Electrical Contractor license for this project. The Subcontracting firm for the fire alarm system shall be a certified "EF" installer.
1.23 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. This Contractor shall provide AutoCad as-built drawings and copies of each AutoCad file on CD before final payment will be issued.
*** END OF SECTION ***
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-10 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16060
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical Demolition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on drawings.
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company and school facility.
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
D. Existing Electrical Service and Distribution System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the Owner at least one week before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
E. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary power and lighting for all areas and for trades. Lighting levels shall equal the existing condition prior to demolition work.
3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 1 and this Section.
B. If any conflicts arise in the field as to which equipment, ductwork, etc., is to be removed, then this Contractor shall notify the Owner/Engineer in writing and shall include a sketch and description of the field conflict for further direction.
C. In areas where demolition is required of this Contractor, then this Contractor shall be responsible for all phases of demolition, including, but not limited to, removal, storage, and reinstallation of items to remain.
D. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
E. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
F. Remove exposed, abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors and patch surfaces.
G. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed or remove boxes for wall to be patched.
H. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
I. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.
J. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.
K. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
L. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
M. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1.
*** END OF SECTION ***
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16111
CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal Conduit.
B. Flexible Metal Conduit.
C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit.
D. Electrical Metallic Tubing.
E. Nonmetal Conduit.
F. Fittings and Conduit Bodies.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16130 ...... Boxes.
B. Section 16170 ...... Grounding and Bonding.
C. Section 16190 ...... Supporting Devices.
D. Section 16195 ...... Electrical Identification.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1—Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3—Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1—Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
D. ANSI/NFPA 70—National Electrical Code.
E. NECA "Standard of Installation."
F. NEMA TC 2—Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
G. NEMA TC 3—PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
CONDUIT 16111-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 1-1/4 inches.
B. Accurately record actual routing of all underground conduits.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Division 1.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch homeruns, only with a maximum of 3-phase conductors.
B. Underground Installations: 1. More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use thickwall nonmetallic conduit, Schedule 40 PVC. 2. Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use thickwall nonmetallic conduit, Schedule 40 PVC. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use Schedule 40 PVC. 4. Minimum Size: ¾" (PVC).
CONDUIT 16111-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
5. Install rigid steel, long radius elbows for conduits larger than 1". Paint under slab conduit or poured-in concrete with a coat of Bitumastic, continuously and up through penetration of concrete slabs.
C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid galvanized steel or intermediate aluminum conduit and liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
D. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel and liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, and electrical metallic tubing.
2. Exposed: Use rigid steel below eight feet and electrical metallic tubing above eight feet.
F. Exterior Aluminum Canopy/Covered Walkways: Use aluminum intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
2.02 METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings.
2.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel set screw type.
2.06 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
CONDUIT 16111-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D. Support conduit using coated steel straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190.
G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports.
H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. Exposed conduits shall only be run in mechanical and electrical rooms.
K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L. Do not cross conduits in slab.
M. Provide nominal 4" cast-in-place concrete curbs at floor mounted electrical distribution panel conduit connections for conduits stubbed-up from below slab.
N. Maintain minimum six inch (6") clearance between conduit and piping.
O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
CONDUIT 16111-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
S. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.
T. Install no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender or factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
V. Provide fittings designed to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses, control, and expansion joints.
W. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170.
Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.
AA. Install rigid steel long radius elbows, size 1-¼" and larger, in below grade and first floor slab conduit runs.
AB. Exterior conduit stub-ups shall be rigid galvanized coated with Bitumastic 1-¼" and larger. Concrete encase with a minimum 3" coverage from beginning of 90 degree elbow stub up to 3" above grade.
AC. Maintain Manufacturer's recommended minimum bending radius on flexible conduit.
AD. Flexible metal conduit shall not be over six feet (6') long. Motors three feet (3') long.
AE. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for a flexible connection only, not raceways.
AF. Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used in wet location and mechanical room for flexible connections only.
AG. Install insulated bushing on all conduits.
AH. Install grounded metal insulated bushing with lug on all mains, sub-feeders, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, chillers, disconnects, and equipment rated at 100 amps and above.
AI. Install and seal boxes and conduit in acoustical treated walls and ceilings per architectural acoustics specifications.
CONDUIT 16111-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods that are UL listed and tested.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified under Division 7.
*** END OF SECTION ***
CONDUIT 16111-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16120
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building Wire and Cable.
B. Remote Control and Signal Cable.
C. Power Limited Fire Protective Signaling Cable.
D. Wiring Connectors and Connections.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16111 ...... Conduit.
B. Section 16130 ...... Boxes.
C. Section 16195 ...... Identification.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70—National Electrical Code.
B. NEMA WC5—Thermoplastic-insulated wire and cable for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Conductor sizes are based on copper.
C. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 1.
B. Determine required separation between cable and other work.
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16120-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor: Copper, #12 minimum.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN, XHHW material rated 90 degrees C.
E. Provide XHHW type cable for all wiring installed between VFDs and motor.
2.02 CLASS 1 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE
A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type TFFN, THHN.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
2.03 CLASS 2 OR 3 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE
A. Description: NEMA/ICEA WC5, thermoplastic insulated cable, individual insulated conductors twisted together, metallic shielded and covered with PVC jacket when installed in metal raceway.
B. Conductor: Copper, stranded.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 300 volts.
2.04 CLASS 1 AND NON POWER—LIMITED FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALING CABLES
A. Description: NEMA/NFPA 70, type TFFN, THHN installed in metal raceway.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
2.05 POWER LIMITED FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALING CABLES
A. Description: NEMA/NFPA 70, type TFFN, THHN installed in metal raceway.
B. Conductor: Copper.
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16120-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.03 WIRING METHODS
A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire and cable (all types) in raceway.
B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: For feeders, branch circuits, and class 1 remote control circuits, use only building wire in raceway. For class 2 or 3 control cable and power limited fire protective signaling cables run in raceway.
C. Above Accessible Ceilings: For feeders, branch circuits and class 1 remote control cables use only building wire in raceway. For class 2 or 3 remote control cables run exposed. For power limited fire protective signaling cables run in raceway.
D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: For feeders, branch circuits and class 1 remote control cables use only building wire in raceway. For class 2 or 3 remote control cable and power limited fire protective signaling cables run in raceway.
E. Exterior Locations: For feeders, branch circuits and class 1 remote control cables use only building wire run in raceway. For class 2 or 3 remote control cables and fire protective signaling cables run in raceway.
F. Underground Installations: For feeders, branch circuits and class 1 remote control cables use only building wire run in raceway. For class 2 or 3 remote control cables and for power limited fire protective signaling cables run in raceway.
G. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Each branch circuit shall have a dedicated neutral conductor. Shared neutrals on multiwire branch circuits are not acceptable.
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16120-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 12 AWG and smaller.
D. Use stranded conductors for control circuits and for feeder and branch circuits No. 8 and larger.
E. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
F. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits.
G. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
H. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.
I. All conductors size #6 and smaller shall be color coded insulation. Equipment grounding conductors #6 and smaller to have green or bare exterior finish per NEC 250-119(A). Grounded conductors (neutral) #6 and smaller to have a white or grey exterior finish per NEC 200-6. Conductors size #4 and larger shall be color code by use of colored plastic tape applied within 6" of each conductor end. All color coding shall be with the same color being used with its respective phase or bus through the entire job as follows:
208/120 VOLTS 277/480 VOLTS Phase A ...... Black Phase A ...... Brown Phase B ...... Red Phase B ...... Orange Phase C ...... Blue Phase C ...... Yellow Neutral ...... White Neutral ...... Gray Ground ...... Green Ground ...... Green
J. Grounding conductors shall be identified with a continuous outer finish that is either green, or green with one or more yellow stripe.
K. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
L. Protect exposed cable from damage.
M. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
N. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
O. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
P. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Q. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise.
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16120-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
R. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.
S. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
T. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
U. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
V. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.
W. Provide XHHW type cable for all wiring installed between VFDs and motor.
3.05 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195.
B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Division 1.
B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values.
D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.
E. Verify continuity of each control circuit conductor.
F. Verify proper phasing of conductors.
*** END OF SECTION ***
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16120-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16120-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16130
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall and Ceiling Outlet Boxes.
B. Floor Boxes.
C. Pull and Junction Boxes.
D. In-ground Cast Concrete Boxes.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16010 ...... Basic Electrical Requirements.
B. Section 16141 ...... Wiring Devices.
C. Section 16160 ...... Cabinets and Enclosures.
D. Section 16195 ...... Electrical Identification.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA OS 1—Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
B. ANSI/NFPA 70—National Electrical Code.
C. NEMA 250—Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets to rough-in.
C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose.
BOXES 16130-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.
2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy deep type. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.
2.02 FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable.
B. Material: Cast metal with brass cover plate.
C. Shape: Round or Rectangular.
D. Conform to regulatory requirements for concrete-tight floor boxes.
E. Hubbell: B-2436, B-4233, and B-4333 Series.
F. Walker: 880CS1, 880CS2, and 880CS3.
G. Replace trims, covers, and device with new in existing floor boxes.
2.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B. Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface- mounted junction box.
1. Material: Cast aluminum.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
C. In-Ground Cast Concrete Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, inside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting:
1. Material: Cast concrete or polymer concrete reinforced.
2. Cover: Nonskid cover with stainless steel cover screws capable of light vehicular traffic.
BOXES 16130-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
3. Cover Legend: Electric, telephone, fire alarm, CATV, etc.
4. Cut conduit openings using tools and methods recommended by the manufacturer.
5. In-ground pull boxes shall have solid bottoms with weep holes as manufactured by Quazite 'PG' series or approved equal.
6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.
C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods that are UL listed and tested.
F. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices with each other.
G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.
H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 12 inch separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
BOXES 16130-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
N. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.
O. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. Provide barriers to separate different voltage systems.
P. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
Q. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
R. Set floor boxes level.
S. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches (1 600 cubic centimeters) in volume or 12 inches (300 mm) in any dimension.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosure under provisions of Section 16160.
2. Other Locations: Use surface-mounted cast metal box.
T. Identify boxes under provision or Section 16195.
3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with General Contractor and other trades.
B. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
C. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and backsplashes.
D. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.
B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C. Install knockout closure in unused box opening.
*** END OF SECTION ***
BOXES 16130-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16141
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall Switches.
B. Wall Dimmers.
C. Receptacles.
D. Device Plates and Decorative Box Covers.
E. Time Switch.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15975 ...... Building Management and Automatic Temperature Control System.
B. Section 16130 ...... Boxes.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NEMA WD 1—General Purpose Wiring Devices.
B. NEMA WD 5—Specific Purpose Wiring Devices.
C. NEMA WD 6—Wiring Device Configurations.
D. Federal Specification—FS-W-C-596 Series—General Specifications.
E. Federal Specification—FS-W-S-896 Series—Toggle Switches.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.
WIRING DEVICES 16141-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Manufacturer's Instructions:
1. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Slater.
2. Hubbell.
3. G.E.
4. Leviton.
5. Pass & Seymour.
6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy-duty AC only general-use snap switch.
C. Device Body: White plastic with toggle handle.
D. Indicator Light: Separate pilot strap; red color lens.
E. Locator Light: Lighted handle type switch; red color handle.
F. Voltage Rating: 120-277 volts, AC.
G. Current Rating: 20 amperes.
H. Motor Rating: Motor rated for fractional horsepower.
I. Motors 1/2 HP and Smaller: Provide switch with thermal overloads to match motor nameplate rating, if motor does not have built-in overload protection.
2.02 WALL DIMMERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Lutron.
2. Leviton.
3. G.E.
WIRING DEVICES 16141-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
4. Pass & Seymour.
5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Type I semiconductor dimmer for incandescent lamps.
C. Device Body: White plastic with rotary knob and slider knob.
D. Voltage: 120 volts.
E. Power Rating: Match load shown on Drawings; 1000 Watts minimum.
2.03 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Slater.
2. Hubbell.
3. G.E.
4. Leviton.
5. Pass & Seymour.
6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Description: NEMA WD 1; heavy-duty general-use receptacle, 20 amp.
C. Device Body: White plastic for general use receptacles. Gray plastic for clean/data communications receptacles. Red plastic for emergency power receptacles (refer to plans for locations).
D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; type as specified and indicated.
E. Convenience Receptacle: NEMA Type 5-20.
F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.
G. Childproof Receptacles: Shall be hospital grade with integral thermoplastic safety shutter to prevent access of foreign objects to the electrical contacts of the receptacle.
2.04 WALL PLATES
A. Decorative Cover Plate: White Lexan.
1. Slater.
WIRING DEVICES 16141-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2. Hubbell.
3. G.E.
4. Leviton.
5. Pass & Seymour.
6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Recessed Weatherproof Cover: U.V. Resistant polycarbonate recessed cover and outlet box. Gasketed with while-in-use device cover and recessed sleeve. Shall be in compliance with NEC 2005.
1. Intermatic.
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
2.05 TIME SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers
1. Intermatic.
2. Paragon.
3. Tork.
B. Furnish and install where shown time switches of the twenty-four hour or seven day type, powered by a self-starting synchronous motor, capable of being set for different on-off times each day of the week, to an operating accuracy of plus or minus 15 minutes of the desired time and with day omitting device.
C. Time switch contacts shall be capable of switching 40 amperes per pole continuously at rated voltage as indicated and shall have pole and switching arrangement as indicated on the drawings.
D. Removable on-off trippers shall make possible multiple on-off periods. Separate manual on and off levers shall enable operation by hand without disturbing automatic settings.
E. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 for indoor flush use and NEMA 3R for outdoor use. NEMA 1 enclosure shall have combination 1/2" - 3/4" knock-outs on bottom and both sides. Provision shall be made for positive padlocking and/or sealing.
F. Terminals shall be capable of receiving up to #8 AWG wire.
WIRING DEVICES 16141-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify conditions under provisions of Division 1.
B. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
C. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify floor boxes are adjusted properly.
E. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install devices plumb and level.
C. Install switches with OFF position down.
D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.
E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.
G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
J. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
WIRING DEVICES 16141-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
L. Assemble all devices and equipment shipped loose with furniture furnished by others as a part of this project. Provide all necessary wiring, plugs, conduit, etc., required to complete this work.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated on Drawings.
B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter and coordinate with Architectural drawings.
E. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor.
F. Install telephones and computer outlet boxes eighteen inches (18") above finished floor.
G. Install telephone and computer outlet boxes six inches (6") above backsplash of counter.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
*** END OF SECTION ***
WIRING DEVICES 16141-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16160
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Hinged Cover Enclosures.
B. Cabinets.
C. Terminal Blocks and Accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NEMA 250—Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
B. ANSI/NEMA ICS 1—Industrial Control and Systems.
C. ANSI/NEMA ICS 4—Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems.
D. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6—Enclosures for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Shop Drawings for Equipment Panels: Include wiring schematic diagram, wiring diagram, outline drawing and construction diagram as described in ANSI/NEMA ICS 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A. Construction: NEMA 250; Type 1 steel.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key.
D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gage steel, white enamel finish.
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.02 CABINETS
A. Cabinet Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable endwalls, 24 inches wide, 24 inches high, 6 inches deep minimum. Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard painted matte white, for mounting terminal blocks.
B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, surface type with screw cover front, concealed hinge and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard; finish in gray baked enamel.
2.03 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4; UL listed.
B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type, closed-back type, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts.
C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, channel mounted; tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts.
D. Copper Ground Bar Strip with #6 Copper Grounding: Electrode conductor to building steel.
2.04 MANUFACTURERS
A. Burndy #RK Series.
B. Buss.
C. Belden.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6.
B. Provide conduit hubs on enclosures.
C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure.
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum.
B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures.
C. Install trim plumb.
*** END OF SECTION ***
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16170
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding Electrodes and Conductors.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductors.
C. Bonding.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70—National Electrical Code.
1.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. Metal underground water pipe.
B. Metal frame of the building.
C. Concrete-encased electrode.
D. Rod electrode.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 10 ohms.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROD ELECTRODE
A. Material: Copper-clad steel.
B. Diameter: 3/4 inch.
C. Length: 20 feet.
2.02 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Material: Bronze.
2.03 WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Foundation Electrodes: 2 AWG.
C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
C. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Bond steel together.
D. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
E. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
F. Bond together each metallic raceway, pipe, and other metal objects.
G. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Interface with systems installed under Sections 16450 and 16610.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.
B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. Submit test results to Engineer for review and approval immediately upon completing the test and prior to energizing new utility service. The testing shall include sufficient ground resistant data readings from distances up 100 feet away from the ground triad in order to plot a distinct plateau between two distinctive slopes.
*** END OF SECTION ***
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Conduit and Equipment Supports.
B. Fastening Hardware.
1.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL/FINISH
A. General Locations: Steel equipment hangers, miscellaneous steel supports, hardware, bolts, washers, nuts, screws, etc., not specified to be plated or coated shall be hot dipped galvanized with a minimum of 1.50 oz/ft. on all sides and all field cuts shall be zinc coated.
B. Located In or Around Cooling Tower Yards: Pipe hangers, equipment supports, miscellaneous structure components, hardware, bolts, washers, nuts, screws, etc., shall be non-metallic polyester resin, vinyl ester resin, fiberglass, glass reinforced polyurethane, or 316 stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors, beam clamps, or spring steel clips.
SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction.
C. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
D. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
E. Do not drill structural steel members.
F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.
G. In wet locations install free-standing electrical equipment on concrete pads.
H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinet one inch off wall.
I. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls.
J. Safety of Overhead Materials, Fixtures, and Equipment:
1. Each troffer or surface mounted fixture (even if integral with the ceiling system) shall be independently secured by a secondary and supplementary system of one (1) separate wire from each of four (4) corners of the fixture to the building's structural framing above.
2. Each pendant mounted fluorescent light fixture shall be independently secured by a secondary and supplementary system of two (2) wires from the canopy and support system of each pendant leg of such fixtures to the building's structural framing above.
3. Each incandescent (or other fixture) shall be independently secured by a secondary and supplementary system of one (1) wire from the fixture can or canopy and support system of each such fixture to the building's structural framing above.
4. Other similar equipment (ceiling speakers, etc.) shall be similarly secured with an independent secondary and supplementary support system.
SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
5. Connection to structure, fixtures, equipment:
a. Wire shall penetrate the cans or canopies of light fixtures and equipment or otherwise connect to such in a fool-proof and positive manner. Wire shall loop through structural framing members above. Wire shall be turned back onto itself and be given two (2) minimum full twists with at least one inch (1") tail remaining beyond the twist. Wire kinked or evidencing failure at twists or elsewhere shall be replaced. Wire shall be installed in a taut fashion (not slack).
b. Wire rope and cable shall penetrate or pass through a portion of the fixture or equipment in a manner adequate to sustain the force developed by the fixture or equipment should it drop or fail. Wire rope and cable shall be either turned back into itself or continue into a complete loop until it lays beside-itself. Wire rope and cable shall be secured to itself with a minimum of two (2) each swagings or clips fully tightened. A minimum of one inch (1") tails shall protrude after tightening of the clamping device.
c. Chain shall pass through a portion of the fixture or equipment in manner adequate to sustain the force should the fixture or equipment drop or fail, or should the primary support system fail or fall. Chain shall be secured to the fixture or equipment and to the building's structural framing by means of special links, shackles or fittings.
d. Wire, chain, wire rope, and cable shall be installed as nearly vertical as possible and in no event at an angle of more than 45 degrees from the vertical.
6. Materials
a. Chain, General Specifications: Equivalent to Campbell Chain Company's specified system of steel, electrically welded standard finish (do not galvanize or electroplate), in continuous lengths. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations.
b. Drop Forged Chain Fittings (eye bolts, pad eyes, inks, chain shackles, snaps, anchor shackles, swivels, turn buckles): Of the same materials and finish as the chain and of the same or greater working load limits, of the same manufacturer or as may be specifically recommended by the chain manufacturer.
c. General Specifications for Wire: 8-gauge galvanized annealed steel wire (multiple strands of lesser gauge will not be considered acceptable). Each wire shall, itself, be looped through the building structural framing above and not to other wiring systems. The angle of the wires shall be kept as vertical as possible and not over 45 degrees from the vertical.
SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
d. Cable for Exposed-to-Public-View-Applications: Where suspended chandeliers, light fixtures, or special equipment occurs, stainless steel flexible aircraft cable or stainless steel flexible marine cable, 302/304, as manufactured by Paulsen, or equal, or Sailbryte as manufactured by Macwhyte corrosion resistant stainless steel or better, right regular lay, in continuous lengths, shall be used. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
e. Forged and other stainless steel fittings for stainless steel aircraft or marine cable (turnbuckles, swagings, Nicro-Press sleeves, wire rope clips, use only in concealed positions), connecting links shoulder rivets, jaw fittings, eye fittings, lifting eyes, thimbles, swivels, eye nuts, heavy thimbles, clevis nuts, eye pads, shoulder pins); of same material, of same or greater working loads limits as the cable, of the same manufacturer or as recommended by the cable manufacturer, of type 304/316 electro-polished finish, drop forged, non-magnetic (when available for particular fitting). Manufactured by Merrill or equal. See Workmanship paragraph below.
f. Stainless steel cable for loads (per cable) not exceeding 100 lbs.: 3/32" 7x19 with tensile load limit of 920 lbs. minimum.
g. Stainless steel cable for loads (per cable) not exceeding 500 lbs.: 3/16" 7x19 with tensile load limit of 3,700 lbs. minimum.
h. Workmanship: Stainless steel cable is required to be used only in areas where such is exposed to "public view" therefore only fittings designed for cold swaging or Nicro-Press fittings or swagless terminals such as Macwhyte Norseman Terminals are to be used whereby no wire ends, nuts, pins, or cotter keys, or clips are visible. Swaging shall be done only with a rotary swager (not a roll swager.) Manufacturer's recommendations and specifications shall be adhered to. Pertinent portions of the booklet Wire Rope Facts published by Banks Wire Rope and Sling, Inc. (available in Tampa) and Construction Care and Maintenance of Marine Rigging by Macwhyte Wire Rope Company (available at the Lazzerette Company) which may pertain also to stainless steel cable, shall be adhered to.
*** END OF SECTION ***
SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Nameplates and Tape Labels.
B. Wire and Cable Markers.
C. Conduit System Junction Box and Pull Box Color Coding.
D. Receptacle Outlet Faceplate Labeling.
E. Panelboard Circuit Index Labeling.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on a white background.
B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type.
C. Receptacle Outlet Faceplate Labeling: Labels shall be a permanent typewritten self adhesive labels with minimum 1/8” black lettering on clear or white background. Labels shall not exceed one line and not overlap the cover.
D. Circuit Index: Provide heavy cardstock paper with permanent typewritten circuiting slipped into a clear plastic pocket fastened to the inside of the panelboard door.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws or rivets. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations.
D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application.
E. Receptacle Outlet Label: Lettering shall be typed – not handwritten. The associated panelboard and circuit number designation shall be permanently labeled on the face of every power receptacle outlet faceplate (as labeled on the drawing). Labels shall be installed level.
F. Typewritten panelboard circuit index cards shall be cut to fit door pockets. Provide one line per circuit and circuit breaker. Each line shall state the type of device or equipment the circuit serves with the location of the device or equipment (room number). For example; include the room number (s) served by the designated device or equipment.
3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring.
3.03 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE
A. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below.
B. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and source.
C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters In Panelboards, Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify circuit and load served, including location.
D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify load served.
E. Transformers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location.
3.04 CONDUIT SYSTEM, JUNCTION BOX, AND PULLBOX COLOR CODING SCHEDULE
A. Coordinate color of paint with Section 09900, Painting, to identifying conduit system junction boxes and pull boxes as scheduled below.
B. Emergency Distribution System: Red.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. 480 Volt, Single and Three Phase System: Blue.
D. 208 Volt, Single and Three Phase System: Black.
E. Fire Alarm System: Red.
F. Motor and Other Control Systems: Purple.
G. Telephone System: Yellow.
H. Television System: Brown.
I. Security System: White.
3.05 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring.
*** END OF SECTION ***
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16425
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Main Switchboards.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16420 ...... Service Entrance.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C12—Code for Electricity Metering.
B. ANSI C39.1—Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments.
C. ANSI C57.13—Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
D. FS W-C-375—Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service.
E. NEMA AB 1—Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
F. NEMA KS 1—Enclosed Switches.
G. NEMA PB 2—Dead Front Distribution Switchboards.
H. NEMA PB 2.1—Instructions for Safe Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Include front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; switchboard instrument details; instructions for handling and installation of switchboard; and electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components.
SWITCHBOARDS 16425-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site under provisions of Division 1.
B. Deliver in 48 inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection, and mounted on shipping skids.
C. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1.
D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
E. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.07 SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish 5 each to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D.
B. General Electric.
C. Siemens.
D. Cutler Hammer.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
2.02 SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION AND RATINGS
A. Factory-assembled, dead front, metal-enclosed, and self-supporting switchboard assembly conforming to NEMA PB2, and complete from incoming line terminals to load-side terminations.
SWITCHBOARDS 16425-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Switchboard electrical ratings and configurations as shown on Drawings.
C. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front only of the switchboard, suitable for the conductor materials used.
D. Main Section Devices: Individually mounted.
E. Distribution Section Devices: Panel mounted.
F. Auxiliary Section Devices: Individually mounted and compartmented.
G. Bus Material: Copper, sized in accordance with NEMA PB 2.
H. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance.
I. Bus spacing based on air insulation.
J. Provide a one x 1/4 inch copper ground bus through the length of the switchboard.
K. Enclosure shall be NEMA PB 2 Type 1—General Purpose. Sections shall align at rear only.
L. Switchboard Height: NEMA PB2, excluding floor sills, lifting members and pull boxes.
M. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc.
N. Pull Section: Same construction as switchboard, size as required per NEC and switchboard manufacturer.
O. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections, suitably insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Continuous current rating as indicated on Drawings.
P. Switchboard shall be UL listed and labeled for service entrance equipment.
2.03 SWITCHING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; provide circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. All main service entrance circuit breakers shall be 100 percent rated.
B. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt switchboards/panelboards, or as shown on Drawings. These ratings may be lowered by short circuit calculations performed by manufacturer stating actual A.I.C. ratings throughout entire system.
SWITCHBOARDS 16425-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboard in locations shown on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NEMA PB 2.1.
B. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard.
C. Furnish and install 4" housekeeping pad for switchboards.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding.
B. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase and phase to ground for one minute each. Test voltage shall be 1000 volts, and minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 2 megohms.
C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using a calibrated torque wrench. Tightness shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended values.
D. Physically test key interlock systems to insure proper function.
E. Switchboards and service entrances shall be inspected and certified by the Engineer's Representative prior to the Owner ordering energization by the utility company.
F. All service entrance conductors shall be meggar tested prior to terminating either end of conductors, to certify that the conductor insulation integrity has not been damaged from handling and/or installation. Contractor shall meggar test the insulation resistance of each conductor phase to phase and phase to neutral for one minute each. Test voltage shall be 1000 volts, and minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 2 megohms. Provide written report of certification testing to Engineer, replace any damaged conductors as necessary prior to terminations.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
C. Adjust trip and time delay settings to values as instructed by the Architect/Engineer.
*** END OF SECTION ***
SWITCHBOARDS 16425-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16440
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Disconnect Switches.
B. Fuses.
C. Enclosures.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 198C—High-Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types.
B. ANSI/UL 198E—Class R Fuses.
C. FS W-F-870—Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses).
D. FS W-S-865—Switch, Box, (Enclosed), Surface-Mounted.
E. NEMA KS 1—Enclosed Switches.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and short circuit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Square D.
B. Siemens.
C. Cutler Hammer.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD, FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: FS W-F- 870.
B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; as indicated on drawings.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—FUSES
A. Bussmann.
B. Gould-Schawmut.
C. Littelfuse Tracor.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
2.04 FUSES
A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: ANSI/UL 198E, Class J for feeders and transformer loads and class RK 5 for motor loads. Dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 250 or 600 volt.
B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
C. Provide three (3) spare fuses for each different size and class of fuse being provided. Store in fuse cabinet (provided by Electrical Contractor) located by Architect/Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Disconnect switch enclosures shall be NEMA Type 3R for exterior applications unless otherwise noted on the drawings, except for installations in or around Cooling Tower Yards, in which the enclosure shall be NEMA Type 4X, stainless steel, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
*** END OF SECTION ***
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16450
SECONDARY GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Power System Grounding.
B. Communication System Grounding.
C. Electrical Equipment and Raceway Grounding and Bonding.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to metallic water service, concrete encased rebar, building steel, and to supplementary grounding electrodes.
B. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe, concrete encased rebar, nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member, and separate grounding electrode.
C. Provide communications system grounding conductor at point of service entrance and connect to separate grounding electrode.
D. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems.
E. Install lightning surge protection on all service entrances as shown on drawings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1.
B. Indicate location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductor.
SECONDARY GROUNDING 16450-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ground Rods: Copper-encased steel, 5/8 inch diameter, minimum length 20 feet.
B. Lightning surge protector to withstand a minimum of a Class "C" test. Refer to Section 16600.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing.
B. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. Provide bonding jumper around water meter.
C. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use driven ground rod on exterior of building.
D. Use minimum 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding conductor. Leave 10 feet slack conductor at terminal board or cabinet.
E. Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company's metering equipment and pad- mounted transformer in accordance with Section 16420.
F. Install lightning surge protector per manufacturer's recommendations on all service entrances as shown on drawings and connect to ground bus.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.
B. Prior to energizing, measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms.
*** END OF SECTION ***
SECONDARY GROUNDING 16450-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16480
MOTOR CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Manual Motor Starters.
B. Magnetic Motor Starters.
C. Combination Magnetic Motor Starters.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16190 ...... Supporting Devices.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6—Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
B. ANSI/UL 198E—Class R Fuses.
C. FS W-F-870—Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses).
D. FS W-S-865—Switch, Box, (Enclosed), Surface-Mounted.
E. NEMA ICS 2—Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Indicate on shop drawings, front and side views of motor control center enclosures with overall dimensions. Include conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components.
C. Provide product data on motor starters and combination motor starters, relays, pilot devices, and switching and overcurrent protective devices.
D. Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of Division 1.
MOTOR CONTROL 16480-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1.
C. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
D. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to motor control center components, enclosure, and finish.
1.07 SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish 5 each to Owner.
B. Fuses: Furnish to Owner 2 spare fuses of each type and rating installed.
C. Fuse Pullers: Furnish one fuse puller to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—MOTOR STARTERS
A. Square D.
B. General Electric.
C. I.T.E.
D. Cutler Hammer.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
MOTOR CONTROL 16480-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
2.02 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
A. Manual Motor Starter: NEMA ICS 2; size as noted on drawings. AC general- purpose Class A manually operated non-reversing full-voltage controller for induction motors rated in horsepower, with overload relay, red pilot light, and key toggle operator.
B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, 1 pole full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and key toggle operator.
C. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually operated 1 pole full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, without thermal overload unit, red pilot light, key toggle operator.
D. Phase Failure and Undervoltage Relay: Contacts and locking potentiometer with undervoltage adjustment and led indicator.
E. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6; as noted on drawings.
2.03 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS
A. Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. Provide with all accessories listed below.
B. Full Voltage Starting: Non-reversing type.
C. Reduced Voltage Starting: Closed-circuit transition wye-delta type.
D. Two Speed Starting: Two speed, two winding, variable torque type. Include integral adjustable time delay transition between FAST and SLOW speeds. Coordinate actual time setting required for motor that starter is connected to with manufacturer.
E. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. Coordinate other voltages with Controls Contractor prior to ordering.
F. Size: NEMA ICS 2; size as shown on Drawings.
G. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; bimetal.
H. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type as shown on drawings. Enclosures for exterior applications shall be NEMA Type 3R unless otherwise noted on the drawings, except for installations in or around Cooling Tower Yards, in which the enclosure shall be NEMA Type 4X – Stainless Steel unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
I. Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with fusible switch disconnect in common enclosure.
MOTOR CONTROL 16480-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
J. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; two field convertible contacts in addition to seal- in contact shall be provided.
K. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2; RUN: green in front cover shall be provided.
L. Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2; HAND/OFF/AUTO, locking type, in front cover shall be provided.
M. Relays: NEMA ICS 2. Provide as necessary for control functions.
N. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary in each motor starter shall be provided.
O. Phase Failure and Undervoltage Relay: Contacts and locking potentiometer with undervoltage adjustment and led indicator shall be provided.
2.04 CONTROLLER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION AND DISCONNECTING MEANS
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: FS W-F- 870. Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—FUSES
A. Bussmann.
B. Gould-Schawmun.
C. Littelfuse Tracor.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
2.06 FUSES
A. Fuses: ANSI/UL 198E, Class RK5; dual element, current limiting, time delay, one- time fuse, 250 or 600 volt.
B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Motor starters supplied by the Electrical Contractor unless otherwise indicated.
MOTOR CONTROL 16480-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
C. Install fuses in fusible switches.
D. Select and install heater elements in motor starters to match installed motor characteristics.
E. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating.
*** END OF SECTION ***
MOTOR CONTROL 16480-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MOTOR CONTROL 16480-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16485
CONTACTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General Purpose Contactors.
B. Lighting Contactors.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6—Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
B. NEMA ICS 2—Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70—National Electrical Code.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Data: Include dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Accurately record actual locations of each contactor and indicate circuits controlled.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience.
CONTACTORS 16485-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS—GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS
A. Square D.
B. General Electric.
C. I.T.E.
D. Cutler Hammer.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor.
B. Coil Voltage: 120 or 277 volts, 60 Hertz.
C. Poles: As scheduled.
D. Size: As scheduled.
E. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation.
2.03 MANUFACTURERS—LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Square D.
B. General Electric.
C. I.T.E.
D. Cutler Hammer.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
2.04 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.
B. Configuration: Electrically held, 2 wire control.
C. Coil Voltage: 24, 120 or 277 volts, 60 Hertz as coordinated with mechanical and electrical drawings for intent of design for control method.
D. Poles: As indicated.
CONTACTORS 16485-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
E. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for continuous loads.
F. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Lighting and power contactors to be located in same room/space as electrical panel serving same equipment. Electrically held contactors shall not located in any space or room sensitive to the contactor holding coil noise output.
*** END OF SECTION ***
CONTACTORS 16485-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CONTACTORS 16485-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
SECTION 16600
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work required under this Division shall include all materials, labor and auxiliaries required to furnish and install complete surge suppression for the protection of building electrical and electronics systems from the effects of line induced transient voltage surge and lightning discharge as indicated on drawings and specified in this Section.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 16010 ...... Basic Electrical Requirements.
2. Section 16111 ...... Conduit.
3. Section 16120 ...... Building Wire and Cable.
4. Section 16130 ...... Boxes.
5. Section 16450 ...... Secondary Grounding.
6. Section 16480 ...... Motor Control.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All Surge Protective Devices (SPD) shall be manufactured by a company normally engaged in the design, development, and manufacture of such devices for electrical and electronics systems equipment.
B. The SPD manufacturer shall offer technical assistance through support by a factory representative and local stocking distributor.
C. Submittals: Surge protective submittal shall include:
1. Schematic data on each suppressor type indicating component types.
2. Dimensioned drawing of each suppressor type.
3. Manufacturer's performance data for each suppressor type.
4. Manufacturer shall furnish complete maintenance and installation manuals and a list of replacement parts.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) 16600-1 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
5. The manufacturer shall certify that their SPD has been designed and tested to fail in a safe, non-violent mode with no smoke, fire, flame, case, or module physical damage.
6. Manufacturer shall provide data indicating how matched M.O.V.'s (sharing of surge currents) were selected and how each M.O.V. would share a surge current.
7. Manufacturer shall provide independent third party test data confirming unit will not have any holdover current.
8. Manufacturer shall submit the cover page of the manufacturer’s UL Test Report to show compliance with UL 1449, latest Edition.
D. Equipment Certification: Items shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, shall bear the UL seal and be marked in accordance with referenced standard U.L. 1449, latest Edition. Protection modes shall be as follows: seven (7) modes Wye = L-N, L-G, N-G; six (6) modes Delta = L-G, L-L.
E. Surge protective devices shall be installed and located in accordance with requirements of all applicable National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. All surge suppression units shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use in accordance with the instructions provided for a period of ten (10) years.
B. Any suppressor unit which shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the warranty period shall be replaced/installed by the Manufacturer at no cost to the Owner.
1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The following standards and publications are referenced in various parts of this specification and shall apply.
1. UL 1449, latest Edition—Surge Protective Devices.
2. ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 (IEEE 587)—Guide for Surge Voltages in Low- Voltage AC Power Circuits.
3. ANSI/IEEE 62.11-1987—Standard for Testing Heavy Duty Service Entrance Surge Arrestor.
4. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1992—IEEE Guide for Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
5. MIL-STD-220A—50 Ohm Insertion Loss Method.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) 16600-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
6. UL 1283—Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
1.05 REQUIRED SUPPRESSORS
A. Provide U.L. transient voltage surge suppression for the equipment described herein and as indicated on the drawings:
1. On electrical service entrance panels.
2. On distribution and branch circuit panels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DEVICES FOR ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PANELS, SECONDARY PANELS, OR BRANCH PANELS
A. Surge Protective Devices shall be installed at the service entrance on the load side of the first main disconnect.
B. Suppressors shall be installed as close as feasible to the device being protected in a position which will minimize lead length between suppressor and the buses or control breaker to which the suppressor connects. Suppressor leads shall not extend beyond the suppressor manufacturer's recommended maximum lead length without specific approval of the Engineer.
C. Suppressors shall be independently third party tested with a Category C3 high exposure waveform (20 kv-1.2/50 us, 10 kA-8/20 us) per ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991.
D. Suppressors shall be designed for the specific type and voltage of electrical service and shall provide clamping action for line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground.
E. Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage of not less than 125% of nominal RMS line voltage for 120V and 115% of nominal RMS line voltage for 277V.
F. The Surge Protective Device shall be life cycle tested as per ANSI/IEEE 62.45-1992 to withstand 1,000 test surges at 10 KA for service entrance devices and 1,000 test surges at 3 KA for all other applications without failure or degradation of UL 1449 clamp voltages by more than 10%.
G. All surge suppression devices utilizing M.O.V.'s shall use only matched M.O.V.'s with similar electrical characteristics allowing each M.O.V. to share surge currents.
H. Suppressors shall be UL 1449, latest Edition, listed for all specified suppression modes and shall be approved for the location in which they are installed.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) 16600-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
I. Suppressors shall have an operating temperature range of -40 degrees C to +50 degrees C.
J. The SPD shall provide up to 50 db EMI/RFI attenuation from 10 KHz to 50 KHz.
K. Provide visible/audible or redundant visible alarm systems to indicate when the unit is operable and when it has failed. The alarm system shall be provided for each coupling mode.
L. When suppressors utilize replaceable module design, each module shall have individual alarm systems providing either visible/audible or redundant visible indication of when the module is operable and when it has failed.
M. Suppressors shall utilize copper bus bars.
N. Maximum response time of the unit shall be less than 5 nanoseconds.
2.02 SUPPRESSOR CRITERIA: SUPPRESSORS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA
A. Service Entrance
1. 277/480 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Wye
a. Minimum Single Impulse Current Rating: 150,000 amperes per coupling mode.
b. Suppressors shall be failsafe, shall not holdover current, shall have repeated surge capability, shall be solid state with replaceable modules, shall be self-restoring, and shall be fully automatic.
c. The UL 1449 Voltage Protective Rating shall not exceed the following (not including any integral disconnects):
VOLTAGE L-N N-G L-G 120/208 1000 800 1000 277/480 1,500 1,200 1,500
d. Terminals shall be provided for all of the necessary power and ground connections. Each terminal shall accommodate wire sizes of #8 to #1 AWG.
e. Suppressors shall be equipped with the following items:
1. Dry contacts (isolated from rest of system).
2. Integral UL listed disconnect switch.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) 16600-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
B. Distribution Panel (Non-Modular Design):
1. 277/480 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Wye a. Minimum Single Impulse Current Rating: 50,000 amperes per coupling mode.
b. The UL 1449 Voltage Protective Rating shall not exceed the following (not including any integral connections):
VOLTAGE L-N N-G L-G 120/208 700 700 1000 277/480 1,200 1,200 1,200
C. Branch Circuit Panel (Non-Modular Design):
1. 120/208 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Wye
a. Minimum Single Impulse Current Rating: 50,000 amperes per coupling mode.
b. The UL 1449 Voltage Protective Rating shall not exceed the following (not including any integral disconnects):
VOLTAGE L-N N-G L-G 120/208 700 700 1000 277/480 1,200 1,200 1,200
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).
B. PQ Protection.
C. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.
D. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
E. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
F. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
G. Eaton (Cutler Hammer)
H. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) 16600-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. STATE COLLEGE OF FLORIDA VENICE CAMPUS—CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT IMPROVEMENTS MATRIX PROJ. #16-0700.4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPRESSORS
A. Suppressors shall be installed as close as practical to the electric panel to be protected, consistent with available space.
B. Suppressors shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. Lead dress shall be as short and as straight as possible and be consistent with recommended industry practices for the system on which these devices are installed.
C. Equipment shall be installed following manufacturer's recommendations and guidelines in compliance with NEC Article 280/250 for grounding and bonding; NEC Article 110-9 and 110-10 for overcurrent protection.
D. All surge protective devices specified in this specification section shall be designed and installed such that normal operation of the system shall not be impaired by the installation of these devices.
*** END OF SECTION ***
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) 16600-6 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC.